Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all
the know–how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and
our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.
This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can
enjoy many years of safe motoring.
When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction.
Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Lexus Roadside Assistance 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free)
(1–800–255–3987)
HAWAII:
Lexus Customer Service Assistance
1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free)
(1–800–255–3987)
CANADIAN OWNERS
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service
1–800–26–LEXUS (Toll–Free)
(1–800–265–3987)
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited
warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
Your responsibility for maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual
gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of
your Lexus
A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accessories for
Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they
may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuine Lexus
products. Modification with non–genuine Lexus products
could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even
violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
Spark ignition system of your Lexus
The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing
Equipment Standard.
Installation of a mobile two–way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system,
cruise control system, anti–lock brake system, SRS airbag
system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check
with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the
system of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed
and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
On–pavement and off–road driving tips
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
from an ordinary passenger car because it is designed for
off–road use also. In addition, this vehicle has a higher ground
clearance and center of gravity than that of an ordinary
passenger car. This vehicle design feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to rollover. Failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure to read
“Off–road vehicle precautions” on page 220 and “Off–road
driving precautions” on page 223.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this
page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please
read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual
carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation
of your vehicle.
SECTION 2 – AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are
explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can
make full use of them.
SECTION 3 – STARTING AND DRIVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features
affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe
driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything
in this section, and remember – drive safely!
The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy
reference to the appropriate pages.
SECTION 4 – IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.
BASIC OPERATION – QUICK REFERENCE
Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily
understandable way for quick reference.
SECTION 1 – INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed
below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points
you should pay particular attention to.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Keys and doors
Switches
Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
Interior equipment
Exterior equipment
Comfort adjustment
Theft deterrent
This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent
situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire,
etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this
Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.
SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE
This section explains the importance of regular maintenance.
Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your
Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.
SECTION 6 – SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided
here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection
and maintenance yourself.
INDEX
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual
so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are
searching for.
In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.
These are used in the following ways:
GAS STATION INFORMATION
The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at
the gas station is provided here.
QUICK INDEX
This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed
information when an urgent situation arises.
Safety symbol
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in order
to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to
your Lexus and its equipment.
Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a
considerable amount of information. To use this
information most effectively, please take the time to
familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the
manual.
In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through
it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PR097
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Page
1
Door lock switch and power window
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 33
2
Side vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4
Headlight, turn signal and fog
light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28, 29
5
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31
6
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
7
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 154
9
Multi–display
Cruise information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . 154
Page
10
Car audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
11
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . 45
12
Glove box/CD automatic changer . . . . . . . . . . 64/178
13
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
14
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
15
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
16
Traction control system off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 207
17
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 196
18
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
19
Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
20
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
21
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,150
22
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
23
Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
24
Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . . . 98
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Two–wheel drive models sold in U. S. A.)
PR067
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Page
Page
1
Vehicle skid control system warning light . . . . . . . 49
15
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2
Traction control system OFF
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
16
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
17
3
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 211
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
18
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
19
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . 47
6
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
20
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 196
21
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8
ODO/TRIP knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
22
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
23
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
24
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
11
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
25
12
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
26
Overdrive off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
14
Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 48
27
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
28
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Four–wheel drive models sold in U. S. A.)
PR068
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Page
Page
1
Vehicle skid control system warning light . . . . . . . 49
15
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 211
16
3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
17
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
18
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . 47
6
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 196
19
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
20
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
21
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
22
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7
ODO/TRIP knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
8
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
9
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
11
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
13
Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 48
14
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
23
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
24
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
25
Overdrive off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
26
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
27
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Two–wheel drive models sold in Canada)
PR069
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Page
Page
1
Vehicle skid control system warning light . . . . . . . 49
15
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2
Traction control system OFF
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
16
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
17
3
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 211
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
18
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
19
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . 47
6
Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
20
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 196
21
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8
ODO/TRIP knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
22
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
9
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
23
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
24
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
11
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
25
12
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
26
Overdrive off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
14
Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 48
27
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
28
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Four–wheel drive models sold in Canada)
PR070
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Page
Page
1
Vehicle skid control system warning light . . . . . . . 49
15
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 211
16
3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
17
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5
Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
18
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . 47
6
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 196
19
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
20
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
21
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
22
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7
ODO/TRIP knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
8
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
9
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
11
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12
Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
13
Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 48
14
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
23
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
24
Automatic headlight leveling system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
25
Overdrive off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
26
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
27
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL
Page
PR098
1
Tilt steering adjustment
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2
Seat position, seat cushion
angle and height control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89
3
Seatback angle control switch . . . . 88
4
Lumbar support control switch . . . 89
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each section.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
EXTERIOR VIEW
Page
PR048
1
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5
Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 30, 320
6
Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . 97
7
Side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8
Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
9
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 322
10
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each section.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
Quick reference
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
2
2
3
4
5
1. DRIVER’S SEAT
2. TILT STEERING WHEEL
Seat position
Seat cushion angle
BR027
Seat cushion height
To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle:
1. Pull the lever up while holding the steering wheel.
2. Up or down the steering wheel to the desired angle.
3. Release the lever.
Seatback angle
Lumbar support
Head restraint height
Head restraint angle
3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Lock release button (To prevent misshifting)
Parking, engine starting and key
removal position
Reverse position
Neutral position
Normal driving position
(with overdrive on)
Stronger engine braking
Overdrive switch
For selecting either a three–speed or
four–speed transmission
“O/D OFF” indicator
light on the instrument
cluster
Maximum engine braking
BR038
With the brake pedal depressed,
shift while holding the lock release
button in. (The ignition switch must
be in “ON” position.)
Shift while holding the lock release
button in.
Shift normally.
Note: When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift the transmission by pushing and releasing the overdrive
switch, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see page 205.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
With the ignition OFF
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
BE004
High beam
BE005
Headlight flasher
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Headlights also turn on.
Automatic light control
Right or left turn
BE006
With the engine started and parking brake released
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Headlights turn on at full
intensity.
Automatic light control
BE004
Lane change (Right or left)
5. WIPER SWITCH
Front
Intermittent operation
1
Low speed operation
BR007cHigh speed operation
2
Washer on
Rear
3
Wiper on
(Intermittent operation)
4
Wiper on
(Normal operation)
BR008 Washer also on
5
6
Washer on
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
1–1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keys and doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Engine immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
KEYS
Since the doors can be locked without a key, you should always
carry a spare master key in case you accidentally lock your
keys inside the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys,
duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key
number.
11R105
1
Master keys (black) – These keys work in every lock.
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with
built–in transponder chip, your dealer will need it.
2
Sub key (gray) – This key will not open the glove box.
3
Key number plate – Keep the plate in a safe place
such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been
placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These chips
are needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be
careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate
key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the
engine.
To protect items locked in the glove box when using valet
parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in
a safe place.
Flat key
Starting the engine using a flat key
11R089
As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start
the engine with this key.
The flat key works in every lock.
A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been
placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is needed to
enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose
this key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be
able to cancel the system or start the engine.
Insert your flat key plate in its key case as shown. We
recommend that you always carry this with you for emergency
use. Do not leave it in your vehicle.
11R090
1. Remove the key plate from the key case.
2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator
light keeps flashing.
3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10
seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light
goes out. This means the engine immobiliser system is
automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobiliser
system” on page 12.) You can put the key case away then. You
cannot cancel the engine immobiliser system if 10 seconds
have past after you inserted the key plate. You need to remove
the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the
step 2.
4. Start the engine within 60 seconds after the security
indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 60
seconds have past after the security indicator went off. You
need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try
it again from the step 2.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
NOTICE
Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate
may fall out or become bent also.
The flat key is designed for emergency use only. So
do not use it regularly instead of other master keys.
11L021-2
When using a key containing a transponder chip,
observe the following precautions:
When starting the engine, do not use the key with a
key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the
key ring against the key grip. Otherwise the engine
may not start, or may stop soon after it starts.
11R055
When starting the engine, do not use the key with
other transponder keys around (including the flat key
and keys of other vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip. Otherwise the engine
may not start, or may stop soon after it starts. If this
happens, remove the key once and then insert it
again after taking off other transponder keys
(including the flat key and keys of other vehicles)
from the ring or while gripping or covering them with
your hand to start the engine.
11R091
Do not bend the key grip or flat key.
Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material
that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other
objects.
Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high
temperatures for a long period, such as on the
dashboard and hood under the direct sunlight.
Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an
ultrasonic washer.
Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic
materials.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
The transponder chip of the flat key is in its key case. You can
cancel the engine immobiliser system using the flat key. (For
details, see “Flat key” on page 9.)
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to
cancel the system or start the engine.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
11R015
FCC ID: NI4TMIM–3
MADE
IN JAPAN
CAUTION
The engine immobiliser system is a theft prevention
system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic
code to the vehicle. The engine will start, only when the
electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered
ID code for the vehicle.
The system is automatically set when the key is removed from
the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light
flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled
automatically, which enables the engine to start.
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built–in
transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and
master key or the flat key. However, there is a limit to the
number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.
This device
complies with Part
of the FCC
Rules. by
Changes
or modifications
not 15
expressly
approved
Operation
is subject tofor
thecompliance
following two
conditions:
the
party responsible
could
void the
(1) This
devicetomay
not cause
harmful interference,
user’s
authority
operate
the equipment.
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL*
This device complies with RSS–210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
11R007d
1
Locking the doors
2
Unlocking the doors
3
Indicator light
4
Sounding an alarm
NOTE: *This feature can be set inoperative as vehicle theft
deterrent measure in case of the loss of the wireless remote
control key. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and
surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes
once.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
The operational range of the wireless remote control is
approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary
with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote
control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your
Lexus.
In the following cases, the battery in the key may be
discharged. If this is a case, replace it using a special
screwdriver.
The remote control does not work.
The operational range of wireless remote control becomes
extremely short.
The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come
on.
For the replacement of the battery, see “Replacing the battery”
on page 18. You can also have the battery of the key replaced
by your Lexus dealer.
If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same
vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
The wireless remote control key is an electronic
component. Observe the following instructions in order
not to cause damage to the key.
Do not leave the wireless remote control key on places
where the temperature becomes high such as on the
dashboard.
Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
Avoid putting it in water.
Locking/Unlocking the doors
When you push the “LOCK” button on the key briefly, all
the side doors and back door can be locked from outside
the vehicle.
At this time, you can hear one beep* and the turn signal lights
flash.** However, when you push the “LOCK” button with any
door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.***
To stop the buzzer, close all the side doors and back door
securely or push the “UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the
ignition switch, locking cannot be done.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless
remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all
the doors will be automatically locked again.
Even if the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the
locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the
button and then push again.
NOTE: *The beep volume can be changed. **The interior
light can be set not to come on or the duration of lighting can
be changed. ***The time before automatic re–locking can
be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle.
Push the “LOCK” button once again. If they were already
locked, the turn signal lights will flash.
NOTE: *The beep volume can be changed. **The turn
signal lights can be set not to flash. ***The buzzer can be
set not to sound if a door is not closed securely. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
When you push the “UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door
is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3
seconds from the first push, all other side doors and back
door are also unlocked.*
NOTE: *The 2–step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
At this time, two beeps sound.* Together with the activation of
unlocking, the interior light comes on for 15 seconds if the
interior light switch is in “DOOR” position.** However, this
function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position. For further information, see “Interior lights” on page
57.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Sounding an alarm*
Operating the windows and moon roof
The windows and moon roof can be opened using a
wireless key from outside the vehicle.*
11R010e
When you push the “PANIC” button for about 1 second, an
alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
NOTE: *The windows can be set inoperative. The moon
roof can be set to slide open, tilt up or inoperative. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
11R106
If you want to stop the alarm, push any button.
This function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE: *The alarm can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus
dealer for details.
Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof
start to move. A beep sounds just before opening. When you
release the button, the windows and moon roof stop opening.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMRX–1
MADE IN JAPAN
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
FCC ID: NI4TMTX–1
MADE
IN JAPAN
CAUTION
ChangesFCC
or modifications
not expressly approved by
ID: NI4TMRX–1
the party responsible
could void the
MADEfor
INcompliance
JAPAN
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV
technician for help.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS–210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Replacing the battery
For replacement, use a CR1616 lithium battery or equivalent
and a special screwdriver.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken that small children do not
swallow the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
When replacing the battery, be careful not lose the
components.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
11L028–1
1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in
the arrow direction.
NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and negative side of the
battery should be faced correctly.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
11R056
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
Be careful not to bend the electrode of the battery
insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the
inside of the module.
Take care not to lose the screws.
2. Remove the module from the key frame.
5. Install the lid.
6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover
with the screw.
7. When pushing any switch on the wireless key, make sure
the indicator light comes on.
11R057
3. Remove the lid of the module.
4. Take out the discharged battery and put a new battery with
the positive side up.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SIDE DOORS
Locking with inside lock knob
Locking with key
11R012
11R011d
1
Lock
2
Unlock
1
Lock
2
Unlock
Push the knob forward to lock and pull the knob backward
to unlock.
Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and
towards the back to unlock.
When locked, the door cannot be opened with either the
outside or inside door handle.
All the side doors and back door lock and unlock
simultaneously with either front door. In the driver’s door lock,
turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in
succession will unlock all the side doors and back door
simultaneously.* In the passenger’s door lock, turning the key
once will unlock all the side doors and back door
simultaneously.
Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the
door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. When the
key is in the ignition switch and any side door is opened, the
lock knob cannot be moved in the lock position.
NOTE: *The 2–step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The windows and moon roof can be opened and closed from
outside the vehicle using the key. For details, see “Power
window switches” on page 33 and “Moon roof” on page 80.
CAUTION
Locking with rear door child–protector
Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and
locked, especially when small children are in the
vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking
the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from
being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident.
It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
11R101
Locking with power door lock switch
11R102
1
Lock
2
1
Lock
2
Unlock
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear
door so that it does not open from the inside. To do this,
turn the knob to the “LOCK” position as shown and then
close the door.
Unlock
To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door
lock switch down on the front side. Pushing down on the
rear side will unlock them.
The same switch is also located on the front passenger’s side.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
BACK DOOR
Locking and unlocking with key
11R054
11R078
When closing the back door, use the inside handle for
easier reach to the back door.
1
Lock
2
Unlock
3
Open
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn it.
To lock: Turn the key clockwise.
To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.
The back door can be locked and unlocked together with the
side doors by means of the power door lock system. (For
instructions, see “Locking with power door lock switch” on
page 21.)
To close the back door, lower it and press down on it. After
closing the back door, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
See “Luggage stowage precautions” on page 75 for
precautions to observe in loading luggage.
CAUTION
Keep the back door closed while driving. This not
only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from entering the
vehicle.
If the open back door hides the rear stop and tail
lights or rear turn signal lights while you are parked,
other road users must be warned of the presence of
your vehicle by a warning triangle or other device.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the back door dampers, do not
apply any force, paint or let any other foreign matter on
them.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
1–2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Switches
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Headlight dimmer and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger, and windshield
wiper deicer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
12E001–1
To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.
Manually twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on
the headlights if they are needed immediately when
entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second
clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be
reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob
is turned fully on.
12R050a
FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side
marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.
THIRD CLICKSTOP (“AUTO”): The headlights and all other
lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the
surroundings.*
NOTE: *The operating condition or sensitivity can be
changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the
headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail
light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
The automatic light control sensor is on the top of the driver’s
side instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not
affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When the headlights come on: The lights automatically turn off
about 30 seconds after any of the doors is opened and closed
with the ignition key turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.*
Additionally, the lights can be turned off immediately by
pushing the “LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key
with all the doors locked and the trunk lid closed.
NOTE: *The time before turning off the lights can be
changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When only the tail lights come on: The lights automatically turn
off with the driver’s door opened and the ignition key turned to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. To turn them on again, turn the
ignition key to the “ON” position, or turn the headlight switch off
and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop. If you
are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight
switch is off.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Daytime Running Light System
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking
brake is released with the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not go off until the
ignition switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights,
twist the knob to the first clickstop.
Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights
to full intensity for driving at night.
When setting the knob to the third clickstop (“AUTO”), the
headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn
on the other lights depending on the darkness of the
surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter,
the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning
off the other lights.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Automatic headlight leveling system
(Vehicles with discharge headlight only)
12R053
As the headlight beam level is always maintained
automatically at the proper level in all loading conditions, your
headlights do not dazzle other road users.
If this system fails, warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by Lexus
dealer.
HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN
SIGNAL SWITCH
12E003–1
For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low
beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.
A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or
headlight flasher is on.
The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is
off.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
12E004–1
12E005–1
For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the
conventional manner.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The turn signal is self–cancelling after a turn, but after a lane
change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal
a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and
holding it there.
To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the “ON”
position. The fog lights come on only when the headlights
are on low beam.
If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than
normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has
burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse
or the indicator light itself has probably failed.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and
release it.
Also, the wipers will automatically operate a couple of times
after the washer squirts even with the lever in the “OFF”
position.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly
empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding
washer fluid” on page 320.
12R006a
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
1
Interval adjuster
2
Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“INT” position: Intermittent operation
“LO” position: Low speed operation
“HI” position: High speed operation
Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping
time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease
it.
The wiper lever must be in the “INT” position.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly
empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding
washer fluid” on page 320.
NOTICE
Do not operate the rear window wiper if the rear window
is dry. It may scratch the glass.
12R051a
1
Washer on during wiping
2
Washer on
To turn the wipers on, twist the knob at the end of the lever.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
There are 2 settings:
“INT” position: Intermittent operation
“ON” position: Low speed operation
To make the washer squirt, twist the knob downward to
position 2.
To make the washer squirt while operating in “ON”
position, twist the knob upward to position 1.
The knob automatically returns from these positions after you
release it.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER,
AND WINDSHIELD WIPER DEICER
SWITCH
12R010b
CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them
when the switch is on.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the
switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch
once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause
the battery to discharge, especially during stop–and–go
driving. The rear window defogger is not designed to dry rain
water or to melt snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use
a spray de–icer before operating the switch.
NOTICE
To turn the electric rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger on, push the switch.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the
heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear
the surface. An indicator light is on when the defogger is
operating.
Vehicles sold in Canada: The windshield wiper deicers are
equipped to deice the windshield wiper blades by operating
simultaneously with defogger.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has
operated about 15 minutes.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switch off when the engine is not running.
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
12L010
12R083
Operating the switches
1
2
3
4
For driver’s window
For front passenger’s window
For left rear window
For right rear window
To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each
door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by
the switches on the driver’s door.
To raise or lower the window, pull the switch halfway up or
push it halfway down.
Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window
automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.
To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in the
opposite direction and then release it.
The power windows work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, the window can be operated until
any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Operating the window lock switch
Operating the windows from outside the
vehicle
(a) The windows can be opened and closed using an
ignition key.*
12R084
Indicator light
NOTE: *This feature can be set inoperative. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
12R052a
With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s
window can be raised or lowered.
The indicator lights on the switch tell you which of the switches
can be operated.
Insert the ignition key into the keyhole on the driver’s side.
To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the window begins to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction
and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the window begins to open. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
(b) The windows can be opened using a wireless remote
control key.
Push and hold the “UNLOCK” button. When you release
the button, the windows stop opening.
Jam protection function
During automatic raising operation, key off raising operation or
raising operation using the ignition key from the outside, the
window stops and is lowered if something gets caught between
the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work
even if nothing is caught.
CAUTION
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them
use the power window switches without supervision.
Use the window lock switch to prevent them from
making unexpected use of the switches.
Never leave small children alone in the vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still inserted. They
could use the power window switches and get
trapped in a window. Unattended children can be
involved in serious accidents.
Never try jamming any part of your body to make the
jam protection function work intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the window fully
closed.
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Before you close the power windows, always make
sure there is nobody around the power windows. You
must also make sure the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck,
head or hands get caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes
the power windows, make sure he or she operates the
windows safely.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the switch on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
12R013b
To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch. Push
the switch again to turn them off.
All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will
work with the engine running or off and with or without the
ignition key.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you
must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency
flashers are in operation.
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat
heater because they may experience minor burns even
at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
12R054
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or handicapped persons
Persons who have delicate skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.).
1
2
3
4
For driver’s seat
For front passenger’s seat
Low heating temperature
High heating temperature
To turn on the seat heater, push the switch to “LO” (low
heating temperature) or “HI” (high heating temperature).
At this time, the indicator light comes on. Pushing lightly
on the opposite side will turn it off.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat
surface.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switch off when the engine is not running.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
1–3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gauges, meters and service reminder
indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
40
41
42
42
43
51
53
FUEL GAUGE
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended
fuel selection.
13R001b
Low fuel level warning light
The gauge is displayed when the ignition switch is on and
indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the
tank.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low fuel level warning light
comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
13R002
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling
system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The
thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant
to keep the temperature of the engine within the
specified operating range.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 242.
Normal range
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when
the ignition switch is on.
The engine operating
temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine
load.
If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle
and allow the engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions,
such as:
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in
stop–and–go traffic.
Towing a trailer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
TACHOMETER
13R071
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of
rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to
prevent engine over–revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive
engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most
cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel
economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This
may cause severe engine damage.
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
13R004a
“ODO/TRIP” knob
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To
change the mode indication, push the “ODO/TRIP” knob
briefly. Each time you push the knob, the mode changes
in order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B,
then back to the odometer, etc.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The twin trip meter records two different
distances independently.
For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel
economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.
To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading,
push the knob and hold it. The same applies for the B trip
meter.
The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power
source is disconnected.
SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
AND WARNING BUZZERS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(a)
or
DO THIS.
If parking brake is off,
stop immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
Fasten driver’s seat
belt.
(b)
(Indicator and buzzer)
Fasten front
passenger’s seat belt.
(c)
(On the center console)
(d)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer immediately.
(e)
Stop and check.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(f)
DO THIS.
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
DO THIS.
Stop and check.
(m)
Add washer fluid.
(g)
or
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(n)
Fill up tank.
(h)
or
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(o)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(i)
Close all doors.
(p)
(j)
Replace bulb.
(k)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(l)
Stop and check.
Key reminder buzzer
Remove key.
(a) Brake System Warning Light
This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key
is in the “ON” position.
When the parking brake is applied ...
When the brake fluid level is low ...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the
brake fluid level is low.
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and
Buzzer
This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the driver’s seat
belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the
reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light
keeps flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder
Light
Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the
following case:
This light reminds you to buckle up the front passenger’s seat
belt.
The light does not come on even if the parking brake is
applied when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or “START”, the
reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger
seat and does not fasten the seat belt. However, if a front
passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the light may not
flash even when the seat belt is not buckled up.
CAUTION
If the light does not turn off even after the parking brake
is released while the engine is running, immediately
stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer. In this case, the brakes may not work properly
and your stopping distance will become longer.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to
an immediate stop.
If luggage load is placed on the front passenger seat,
depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat,
built–in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure,
causing the reminder light to come on.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(d) SRS Warning Light
(e) Discharge Warning Light
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags and front seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.
This light warns that the battery is being discharged.
The SRS warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side airbag sensors, front seat
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the
battery properly.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning
light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible
to service the vehicle.
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on, remains or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the driver and front
passenger airbags fail. If the light flashes, the side airbags
and/or seat belt pretensioners fail.
If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive
belt.
If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the
charging system.
The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the
battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower,
radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or
repair shop.
NOTICE
Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken
or loose.
(f) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
(g) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is operating properly.
If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road
to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus
dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or
it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for
concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated
slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It
is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must
be checked using the oil level dipstick.
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on – even
for one block. It may ruin the engine.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving,
first check the followings.
Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction
indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp will not go off even after the several trips, contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not
loose...
There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission
control system, automatic transmission electrical system or
warning light system itself.
Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the
malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus
dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and
OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) system before taking your
vehicle for the inspection.
See “Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs”
on page 267.
(h) “ABS” Warning Light
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
(i) Open Door Warning Light
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and the vehicle skid
control system do not operate, but the brake system still
operates conventionally.
If this light comes on when the headlight switch is turned on (at
the first or second clickstop), it indicates that one or more of the
tail lights are burned out.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
Have defective bulbs replaced as soon as possible.
This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.
(j) Rear Light Failure Warning Light
If it comes on when the brake pedal is depressed, one or more
stop lights are burned out.
(k) “VSC” Warning Light
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle skid control system or traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the vehicle skid control
system and traction control system do not work. However, as
conventional braking operates when applied, there is no
problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
(l) Automatic Transmission Fluid
Temperature Warning Light
This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull
off the road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in “P” and leave the engine idling until the light
goes off. If the light goes off, you can start the vehicle again.
If the light does not go off, call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair
shop for assistance.
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
NOTICE
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
Continued driving with the warning light on may
damage the automatic transmission.
The warning light comes on while driving.
(m) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes
nearly empty. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(n) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes
nearly empty. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
How to check all the service reminder
indicators
(except the low fuel level warning light):
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
1. Apply the parking brake.
(o) Automatic Headlight Leveling System
Warning Light (Vehicles with discharge
headlight only)
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off when you close the door completely.
2. Open the door.
This light warns that when there is a problem somewhere in the
automatic headlight leveling system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
and will go off after a few seconds.
3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.
The following service reminder indicators should come on.
If it comes on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
(p) Key Reminder Buzzer
or
This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the
driver’s door with the ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.
or
or
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few
seconds.
CRUISE INFORMATION DISPLAY
or
20R051
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off after 6 seconds.
The following information is shown with the ignition
switched “ON”.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not
function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
(1) Driving time
(2) Average vehicle speed
(3) Average fuel consumption
(4) Momentary fuel consumption
The displayed values in the cruise information display indicate
the general driving condition, so those may not show precise
and actual condition.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(1) Driving time
(Figures with “E/T”)
The elapsed time after the engine started is displayed.
When the engine is started again, the driving time is counted
from 0. Up to 12 hours can be displayed. When the driving time
exceeds 12 hours, recounting starts.
(2) Average vehicle speed
(Figures with “AVG MPH” or “AVG km/h”)
13R050e
The average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed
based on the total driving distance and the total driving
time with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To calculate from the beginning, push the “INFO” button for
more than 1 second.
(3) Average fuel consumption
(Figures with “AVG MPG” or “AVG L/100
km”)
To change the mode, push the “INFO” button briefly on the
audio control panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”, the mode displayed
just before the ignition switch is turned off will appear.
The average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed
based on the total driving distance and the total fuel
consumption with the engine running.
The value is updated every 10 seconds.
To calculate from the beginning, push the “INFO” button for
more than 1 second.
(4) Momentary fuel consumption
(Figures with “MPG” or “L/100 km”)
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL
The momentary fuel consumption is calculated and
displayed based on the driving distance and the fuel
consumption for 2 seconds with the engine running.
The value is updated every 2 seconds.
If you are driving at low speeds just before stopping, the
accurate figure may not be shown.
13R005c
For the display (2), (3) or (4), “– –” will appear in case the
data for calculation is not appropriate.
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
turn the knob.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
1–4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie–down hookss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
56
57
58
59
59
61
61
62
63
64
64
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
VANITY MIRRORS
Sun visors
14R097
14R001a
To use the vanity mirror, swing the sun visor down and
open the cover.
1
To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor
down.
The vanity light comes on when you open the cover.
2
To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor
from the hook and swing it to the side.
3
To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you,
slide the visor backwards.
At this position, the vanity light does not come on.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Rear light:
When the switch is in the “DOOR” position and back door is
opened, the light will come on. The light goes out immediately
when the back door is closed.
14R003a
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
Center light:
When the switch is in the “DOOR” position and any of the side
doors or back door are opened, the light will come on. After all
the doors are closed, the light remains on for about 15 seconds
before fading out.
However, in the following cases, the light goes out
immediately:
1. All the doors are closed when the ignition key is in “ACC”
or “ON” position.
2. The ignition key is turned to “ACC” or “ON” when the light
is still on.
3. All the doors are locked when the light is still on.
4. One door is closed with the lock button pushed in while the
other doors are locked.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
PERSONAL LIGHT
Vehicles with moon roof
Vehicles without moon roof
14R005b
14R004c
To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it
off, push the switch again.
To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it
off, push the switch again.
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
CLOCK
14R102
For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch
light comes on when the driver’s door is unlocked.
The light remains on for about 15 seconds and goes out after
all the doors are closed. However, the light goes out
immediately when all the doors are locked or the ignition key
is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
14R007c
1
2
3
4
12–hour display mode
24–hour display mode
Time setting mode (indication blinking)
Alarm setting mode (indication blinking)
The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition key at
the “ACC” or “ON” position. The mode can be changed by
pushing the “CLOCK” button on the audio control panel.
With the tail lights on, the brightness of the time indication will
be reduced.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the
clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
To disable the alarm activation, push the button indicated by
the “bell” mark at step 3. and turns off the bell indicator on the
display.
14R043
Adjusting the time:
1. Push the “CLOCK” button to enter the time setting mode.
2. Push the “H” or “M” button to adjust the time.
3. Push the “CLOCK” button again.
To set the clock by the radio, adjust the minute to “00” at step
2. and push the “CLOCK” button by the time signal from the
radio.
Setting the alarm:
1. Push the “CLOCK” button to display the alarm setting
mode.
2. Input the time you want to sound an alarm by pushing “H”
or “M” button.
3. Push the button indicated by the “bell” mark. The bell
indicator appears.
An alarm sounds for about 20 seconds at the set time every
day. To stop the alarm, push the “CLOCK” button.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY
14R050b
This display shows the outside temperature when the
ignition switch is on.
14R110
Cigarette lighter
The displayed temperature ranges from –30C (–22F) up to
50C (122F). If the temperature does not appear on the
display or it shows “– –”, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
14R112
Ashtray
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
To use the cigarette lighter, press it in. After it finishes
heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use. To use
the ashtray, push the ashtray cover.
POWER OUTLETS
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.
If the engine is not running, the ignition key must be in the
“ACC” position to use the lighter.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, push it back in completely.
14R010b
To remove the ashtray, just pull it up.
Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for
replacement.
Rear end of the console box
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always completely close the
ashtray after use.
14R051
In the luggage compartment
The power outlets are designed for power supply for car
accessories.
The ignition key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position for the
power outlets to be used.
REAR CONSOLE BOX
NOTICE
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the
electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V/120W
(front and rear outlets together).
14R118
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is
not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid into the outlet may cause electrical failure or
short circuits.
1
For upper box
2
For lower box
To use the rear console box, open as shown in the
illustration.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
GLOVE BOX
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal
Transceiver) is manufactured under license from
HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting
systems, and security systems, etc.
14R044
1
Unlock
2
Open
(a) Programming the HomeLink
3
Lock
14R135
To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the
glove box door, insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.
With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the
glove box door is open.
For the compact disc changer, see page 178.
1
Indicator
2
Buttons
HomeLink
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
The
in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you
can store one program for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install
a new battery in the hand–held transmitter prior to
programming.
The battery side of the hand–held transmitter must be pointed
away from the HomeLink during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an
entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to
program.
2. Place your hand–held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to
3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand–held garage
transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink
button.
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from
a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the
newly programmed button. If programming a garage door
opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage
transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the
rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your
garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary
to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with
the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the
location of this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate
step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed
HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the
door does open, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time.
This third press and release will complete the programming
process by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now
recognize the HomeLink unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another rolling code system.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices
in the Canadian market
1. Decide which of the 3
program.
HomeLink
buttons you want to
2. Place your hand–held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand–held
gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from
a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the
newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device
operates correctly.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems,
home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however,
to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure
“Programming the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate
HomeLink button to activate the programmed device. The
The
HomeLink indicator light should come on.
HomeLink continues to send the signal for up to 20
seconds as long as the button is pressed.
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory
(all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press
and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored
in the HomeLink memory.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or
other device. Make sure people and objects are out
of the way of the garage door or other device to
prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver
with any garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety
standards. (This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling
the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current
federal safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases risk of
serious injury or death.
FCC ID:
CB2SAHL3
CANADA: 279 102 1849A
This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference that
may be received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. WARNING: This
transmitter has been tested and complies with
FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the device.
CUP HOLDERS
14R012b
Front cup holder
To use the cup holder, slide the rear console box.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink–cans
securely. You can adjust the arms to 3 stages.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
14R042b
1
Upper console position
2
Lower console position
The cup holder can be installed as you desired using the
upper and lower rear console boxes.
When the upper console is used as a cup holder, the lower
console may not be used. This applies to the opposite case
when the lower console is used.
14R123
1
Removal
2
Installation
To remove: Pull out the cup holder from the rear console box.
To install: Insert the rear tabs into the cutouts of the rear
console box.
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink–cans in the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
14R058b
14R113
Rear cup holder (rear console box)
Rear cup holder (rear seat cushion)
To use the cup holder, push the button of the rear console
box.
To use the rear cup holder, pull the cup holder portion of
the rear seat cushion.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink–cans
securely. You can adjust the arms to 3 stages.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink–cans
securely.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink–cans on the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink–cans on the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
OVERHEAD CONSOLE BOX
NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.
14R114
To use the overhead console box, open it as shown above.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, always keep the overhead console
box closed while driving.
As this box is designed for holding eyeglasses, do
not place any object heavier than 60 g (0.13 lb.) in it.
Heavier objects may cause the box to open and the
contents to fly out resulting in injuries.
AUXILIARY BOXES
Your vehicle has several types of auxiliary box. To use
them, open as shown in the following illustrations.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed
while driving.
14R023c
On the instrument panel
14R127
In the right side of luggage compartment
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
LUGGAGE COVER
To use the luggage cover:
1
Attach the front hooks of the luggage cover to the head
restraint.
2
Pull out the rear luggage cover and hook it on the anchors.
Using luggage cover
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Such items
may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.
14R133
Removing luggage cover
14R134
FLOOR MAT
14R024
To remove the luggage cover, lift it up.
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
After you remove the luggage cover, place it somewhere other
than the passenger compartment. This will prevent
passengers from injury in the event of a sudden stop or
accident.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have a hole, then it is designed
for use with a locking clip. Fix the floor mat with locking clip into
the hole in the floor carpet.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
TIE–DOWN HOOKS
14R025
14R083
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor
carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
To secure your luggage, use the tie–down hooks as shown
above.
See “Luggage stowage precautions” for precautions to
observe in loading luggage.
LUGGAGE STOWAGE
PRECAUTIONS
When stowing luggage or cargo in the vehicle, observe the
following:
Put luggage or cargo in the luggage compartment when at
all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument
panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of
view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s
control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure
the vehicle occupants.
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as
far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
NOTICE
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle capacity
weight specified on the tire pressure label.
CAUTION
To prevent luggage or packages from sliding forward
during braking, do not stack anything in the luggage
compartment higher than the seatbacks. Keep
luggage or packages low, as close to the floor as
possible.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
compartment. It is not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats with their seat belts
properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more
likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
1–5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exterior equipment
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
HOOD
15R037
15R001a
2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever under
the instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not
forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make
sure it locks.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood is securely locked.
Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while
driving and an accident may occur.
FUEL TANK CAP
15R046
15R006a
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever up.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly
counterclockwise, then pause slightly before removing it.
The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel
filler door.
CAUTION
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is
opened. When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until
you hear a click.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap
quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could
cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the
cap is suddenly removed.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
MOON ROOF
CAUTION
Make sure the cap is tightened securely to prevent
fuel spillage in case of an accident.
Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for
replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank
pressure.
15R009d
1
Open
2
Close
To slide open the moon roof, push the switch on the
“SLIDE OPEN” side briefly. The moon roof will open and
stop partway 50 mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened
position. When you push the switch again, the moon roof
will open fully. To stop partway, push the same side or
“TILT UP” side briefly.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind
throbs, we recommend you to drive with the moon roof partway
50 mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened position.
To operate the moon roof, the ignition key must be in the “ON”
position.
The sun shade can be opened or closed manually. However,
if you open the moon roof, the sun shade will be opened with
the moon roof.
To close the moon roof, push the switch on the “TILT UP”
side. The moon roof will fully close. To stop partway, push
the same side or “SLIDE OPEN” side briefly.
To slide open the tilted–up moon roof:
15R010b
Push the switch on the “SLIDE OPEN” side to tilt down the
moon roof. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the
same side again.
1
Lower
2
Tilt up
To tilt up the rear end of the moon roof fully, push the
switch on the “TILT UP” side or on the “SLIDE OPEN” side
to lower it.
To tilt up the slide–opened moon roof:
Push the switch on the “TILT UP” side to close the moon roof
fully. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the same
side again.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position with all the door closed, the moon
roof can be operated until any of the doors is opened (or for
about 45 seconds).
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Operating the moon roof from outside the
vehicle
(a) The moon roof can be closed or opened using an
ignition key.*
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s
door.
To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the moon roof begins to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
To open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking
direction and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To
stop in the middle, return the key.
NOTE: *This feature can be set inoperative, or sliding open
or tilting up can be selected. Ask your Lexus dealer for
details.
(b) The moon roof can be opened using a wireless remote
control key.
Push and hold the “UNLOCK” button. When you release
the button, the moon roof stops opening.
Jam protection function
During closing operation, the moon roof stops and is open if
something gets caught into the roof opening.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may
work even if nothing is caught.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads,
hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could
be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Before you close the moon roof, always make sure
there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also
make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and
other parts of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the
closing roof, it could result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe
to do so.
Never leave small children alone in the vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still inserted. They
could use the moon roof switches and get trapped in
the roof opening. Unattended children can be
involved in serious accidents.
Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof
opening.
Never try jamming any part of your body to make the
jam protection function work intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the moon roof
fully closed.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
1–6
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Comfort adjustment
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Tilt steering wheell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
FRONT SEATS
Front seat precautions
Seat adjustment precautions
Adjust the driver’s seat so that the foot pedals, steering wheel
and instrument panel controls are within easy reach of the
driver.
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front
passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.
Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle
is in use, since the side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or seriously injured.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
the seats with side airbags. Such changes may
disable the system, or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious
injury. Consult your Lexus dealer if you insist on
modifications of this kind.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags should inflate.
Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from
activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as
the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
When adjusting the seat, be careful that the seat does
not hit a passenger, luggage or the rear seat.
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in more than one
dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
Adjusting front seats
Adjusting seat position
16R002b
16R001c
1
2
3
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
Seat position control switch, seat cushion angle and
height control switch
Seatback angle control switch
Lumbar support control switch
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Adjusting seatback angle
16R003b
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a
collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in
a frontal or rear collision when the driver is sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined,
the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the
risk of personal injury.
Adjusting seat cushion angle and height
(driver’s seat only)
16R004b
Adjusting lumbar support (driver’s seat only)
16R005b
Push the control switch on either side.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is
pushed.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Flattening seatbacks
16R101a
16R100b
4
Before flattening seatbacks, slide the rear seats as far
back as possible.
1
Push the seat position control switch forward to move the
seat forward.
2
Push the seat position control switch upward to raise the
seat (driver’s seat only).
3
Push the lock release button on the head restraint to
remove it.
Move the seatback angle control switch backward to
flatten the seatback.
REAR SEATS
Sliding and reclining rear seats
16R102a
16R283
5
Push the seat position control switch downward to lower
the seat at the same level as the rear seat (driver’s seat
only).
After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to
replace the head restraint.
CAUTION
Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat
while driving; use the seat in the normal position.
Hold the center of the lever and pull it up. Then slide the
seat to the desired position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
When you move the seats forward and unlock the seatbacks,
you can tilt the seatbacks a little rearward.
After putting back the seat, try pushing the seatback
forward and rearward to make sure it is secured in
place. Be certain to replace head restraint.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a
collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection
when the passengers are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal
injury.
Folding down rear seatbacks
16R309
Before folding down rear seatbacks
Stow the rear seat belt buckles as shown above.
16R099
16R271
Seat belt hanger
Folding down rear seatbacks
For the outer seat belts, use the seat belt hangers to
prevent the belts from being tangled.
Lower the head restraints to the lowest position, unlock
the seatbacks and fold them down.
NOTICE
When returning the rear seats to their original position, lift
up the seatbacks until they lock.
The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you fold
down the rear seatbacks.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
ARMRESTS
CAUTION
When returning the seatback to the upright position,
observe the following precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:
Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing
forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from
operating properly.
16R195
Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught
under the seat and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
Front
Rear
To use the armrests, pull them down as shown above.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrests, avoid putting heavy
loads on them.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Front seats
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Rear seats
16R007
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
on the top.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
16R124
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down.
Rear center head restraint — When an occupant sits on the
rear center seat, always pull up the rear center head restraint
to the lock position.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
TILT STEERING WHEEL
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
16R350
To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering
wheel, pull up the lock release lever, tilt the steering wheel
to the desired angle and release the lever.
When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as
you release the lock release lever.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.
After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up
and down to make sure it is locked in position.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur, resulting in death
or serious injuries.
16R010b
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch is on.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen
in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side. It is a
convex mirror with a curved surface. Any object seen in a
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in
a normal flat mirror.
When you push the rear window and outside rear view mirror
defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear window
and outside rear view mirror defogger, and windshield wiper
deicer switch” on page 32.)
Some models: When the inside rear view mirror darkens in
AUTO mode, the outside rear view mirrors also darken to
reduce the reflection of the headlights of the following vehicle.
For details, see “Inside rear view mirror” on page 99.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Power rear view mirror control
16R011b
1
Master switch
2
Control switch
Folding rear view mirrors
16R012
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.
To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master
switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right), and push the control
switch on the desired side.
The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in
restricted areas.
The power rear view mirror can be adjusted when the key is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
CAUTION
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control
or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de–icer to free the
mirror.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the
driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be
extended and properly adjusted before driving.
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle
and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
16R301
1
Type A
2
Day
3
16R295
Night
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your
vehicle in the mirror.
When driving at night, pull the lever toward you to reduce
the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you.
Before adjusting the mirror to the position with most clarity,
push the day–night change lever forward (daylight driving
position).
Remember that by reducing glare you also lose some rear view
clarity.
Type B
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Pushing the switch changes the mode between AUTO and
DAY.
The indicator comes on when the AUTO mode is selected.
DAY mode: The mirror surface is normal.
AUTO mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights
of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens
slightly to reduce the reflected light.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside
rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker.
When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear
view mirror always turns on in the AUTO mode.
When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little
longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
16R380
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle
and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
To ensure correct functioning of an anti–glare mirror
sensor located on the back side of the mirror, do not touch
or cover the sensor with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.
The compass may not show the correct direction in the
following conditions:
Compass (Some models)
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
16R296
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is
subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between
buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle
is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the
vehicle is heading north.
Pushing the “AUTO” button for longer 3 seconds turns on
or off the compass display.
Displays
Directions
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal
object on or near the inside rear view mirror.)
The battery has been disconnected.
The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically
while the vehicle is in motion, if deviation is small.
For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating,
see “Calibrating the compass” below.
If the direction is not indicated or the system does not operate
properly, contact your Lexus dealer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Calibrating the compass
(deviation calibration)
16R297
The direction display on the compass deviates from the true
direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The angle
of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the
vehicle.
To adjust for this deviation, stop the vehicle and push the button
for longer than about 6 seconds until the number (1–15)
appears on the display. Then push the button again, referring
to the following map to select the number of the zone where the
vehicle is.
Compass sensor
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object on or near the
inside rear view mirror of the vehicle. Doing this may
cause malfunction of the compass sensor in the mirror.
Hawaii: 5
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Calibrating the compass (circling calibration)
16R198
16R298
To rectify the compass, stop the vehicle and push the button for
longer than about 9 seconds until “C” appears on the display.
Zone number
There is also a case that “C” appears on the display in case of
a drastic change in the magnetic field.
Leaving the system after the calibration for several seconds,
the direction will appear on the display. It shows the zone
number is set.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
16R200
When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure
a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles
in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic
rules while performing circling calibration.
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle
until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is
displayed.
After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration
is complete with the direction shown on the display.
If you want to cancel the calibration before it is complete, push
the button again.
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place
where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by
artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon
roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the
calibration.
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt precautions
Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the
vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury
and/or the severity of injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for
people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child
until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint” on page 126 for
details.
Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious
bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe the following:
Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use
a single belt for two or more people – even children.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer
when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
Avoid reclining the seatbacks too much. The seat
belts provide maximum protection when the
seatbacks are in the upright position.
(See
“Adjusting seatback angle” on page 88.)
If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn
properly. Do not let the child sit on your lap. It does not provide
sufficient restraint. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are
not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag
may cause severe injury to the child.
Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or
hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or
pinched in the seat or doors.
Do not allow the child to stand up or kneel on either rear or front
seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or
death during emergency braking or a collision.
Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be
replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips
and not on the waist.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning,
use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners – they may
severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the
interior” on page 330 for instructions.)
Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has
been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Fastening front and rear seat belts
16R014a
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the
seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on
impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow,
easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move
around freely.
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and
is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position
and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child
restraint system securely. (For details, see “Child restraint” on
page 126.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then
pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
16R107
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect
an adult occupant or your child from injury.
Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.
1
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips – not
on your waist.
2
Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion
upward through the latch plate.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hips as possible.
16R108
For your safety, do not place the shoulder belt under
your arm.
Front seat belts only
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.
To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the
anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock
release button then slide the anchor down. After the
adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause severe injuries in a
collision.
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are
not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available
from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
16R017b
Please contact your local Lexus dealer to order the proper
required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you
expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of
length. Additional ordering information is available at your
Lexus dealer.
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract.
CAUTION
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for
kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it
retracts.
When using the seat belt extender, observe the
following precautions.
Failure to follow these
instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident,
increasing the chance of personal injury.
Never use the seat belt extender if you can fasten the
seat belt without it.
Remember that the extender provided for you may
not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different seating position than
the one originally intended.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
16R125
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into
the seat belt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the
buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt
are both facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release
button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle
for future use.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect
an adult occupant or your child from injury.
Front seat belt pretensioners
16R021a
16R351
The driver and front passenger’s seat belt pretensioners
are designed to be activated in response to a severe
frontal impact.
When the airbag sensor detects the shock of a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back in by the
retractors so that the belts snugly restrain the front seat
occupants.
The front seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat.
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the front seat belt pretensioners are operating
properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side airbag sensors, front seat
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page
43.)
Collisions occurring at certain speeds and angles may cause
the seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags not to operate all
together.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
16R104a
Do not modify, remove, strike or open the front seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding
area or wiring. Doing so may cause sudden operation
of the front seat belt pretensioners or disable the
system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injuries. Consult your Lexus dealer about
any repairs and modifications.
1
2
3
4
Front airbag sensors
SRS warning light
Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies
Airbag sensor assembly
The front seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the
above components, and their locations are shown in the
illustration.
The front seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
When the front seat belt pretensioners are activated, an
operating noise may be heard and a small amount of
smoke–like gas may be released. This gas is harmless and
does not indicate that a fire is occurring.
Once the front seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the
seat belt retractors remain locked.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the front seat belt
pretensioners in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two–way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player
Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor
assemblies
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure or console
16R106
16R021a
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
This front seat belt pretensioner system has a service reminder
indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If any of
the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of
the pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the front seat belt pretensioners to operate.
Either front seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding
area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on or flashes.
The light flashes while driving.
If either front seat belt does not retract or can not be pulled
out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant front
seat belt pretensioner.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SRS AIRBAGS
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are
designed to provide further protection for the driver and
front passenger in addition to the primary safety
protection provided by the seat belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS
airbags are inflated.
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly
recommends that:
16R352
The driver sit as far back as possible from the
steering wheel while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
The front passenger sit as far back as possible from
the dashboard.
SRS front airbags
In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front
airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce
injury by inflating. The SRS front airbags help to reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or
chest caused by directly hitting the steering wheel or
dashboard.
The front passenger airbag is activated even with no
passenger in the front seat.
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.
All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using
the available seat belts.
CAUTION
16R353
SRS side airbags inflate with considerable force. To
avoid potential death or serious injury when they inflate,
the driver and front passenger must:
Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their back upright and
against the seat at all times.
SRS side airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags
work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The SRS side airbags help to reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat is activated even
with no passenger in the front seat.
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS side
airbags are inflated.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R021a
16R022
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags are operating properly.
The SRS front airbag system is designed to activate in
response to a severe frontal impact within the shaded area
between the arrows in the illustration.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side airbag sensors, front seat
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page
43.)
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact
is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when impacting
straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.
If the severity of the impact is below the above threshold level,
the SRS front airbags may not deploy.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if
the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if it is involved
in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the nose of the
vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions at the lower zone of airbag
sensor detection and activation, the SRS airbags and seat belt
pretensioners will not operate all together.
For the safety of all occupants, always wear your seat belts
properly.
16R024
16R023a
1
2
1
2
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
Collision from the side at an angle
Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than
the passenger compartment
The SRS side airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles,
or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the
passenger compartment as shown in the illustration.
The SRS front airbags are not designed to inflate if the
vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it
is involved in a low–speed frontal collision.
The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact
from the side.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R103
1
2
3
Collision from the front
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbags are not designed to inflate if the
vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over,
or if it is involved in a low–speed side collision.
16R087
1
2
3
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard material
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS front airbags may deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
16R372
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
Side airbag sensors
Airbag sensor assembly
Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
SRS warning light
Front airbag sensors
When the SRS airbag operates, it produces a fairly loud noise
and release some smoke and residue along with non–toxic
gas. This does not indicate a fire. This gas is normally
harmless; however, for those who have delicate skin, it may
cause a minor skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, dashboard,
front seats) may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate
only once.
A crash severe enough to inflate the driver and front passenger
airbags may break the windshield as the vehicle buckles. In
vehicles with a front passenger airbag, the windshield may also
be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating
airbag.
The SRS airbag system consists mainly of the above
components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
In a severe frontal impact, the sensors detect deceleration and
the system triggers the front airbag inflators. In a severe side
impact, the side airbag sensor triggers the side airbag inflator.
At this time, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non–toxic gas to help restrain the forward or
lateral motion of the occupants.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
The SRS airbag system is designed only as a
supplement to the primary protection of the driver
side and front passenger side seat belt systems. The
front seat occupants can be killed or seriously
injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the
available seat belts properly. During sudden braking
just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front
passenger can move forward into direct contact with
or close proximity to the airbag which may then
deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum
protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 105.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying front airbags. An infant or child who is too
small to use a seat belt should be properly secured
using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 126 .
16R062a
Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat because the force of the rapid
inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to the child.
16R046
Move seat fully back
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
16R029a
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean over the
dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front
airbags inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Sit
up straight and well back in the seat, and always use
your seat belt properly.
Do not allow the child to lean against the front door
or around the front door even if the child is seated in
a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side
airbags inflate, because the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 126.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R109
Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle
is in use, since the side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or be seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have a small child in the
vehicle.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing
your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply
excessive weight to the outer side of the front seats
on vehicles with side airbags.
16R031a
Do not allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the
front passenger seat, since the front airbag inflates
with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.
Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use
a child restraint system in the rear seat. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 126.
16R354
Do not put objects or your pets on or in front of the
dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the
front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as they are projected
rearward by the force of the deploying airbags.
Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not
hold objects in their arms or on their knees.
16R355
Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or
object on or around the door. When the side airbag
inflates, the cup holder or any other device or object
will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify,
remove, strike or open any components, such as the
steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover,
front passenger airbag cover, front seats or airbag
sensor assembly. Doing so may cause sudden SRS
front airbag inflation or disable the system, which
could result in death or serious injury.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
front seats with side airbags. Such changes may
disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repairs and modifications.
16R021a
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag
system in some cases.
The SRS airbag system has an indicator to inform the driver of
operating problems. If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags. Contact your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two–way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light
does not come on, stays on or flashes.
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure and side
structure of the passenger compartment
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure, console, steering column, steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag or front
seats
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the driver and front
passenger airbags fail. If the light flashes, the side airbags fail.
The surface of the seats with the side airbags or the pad
section of the steering wheel or front passenger airbag
cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
16R356
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle and portion of the doors (shaded in
the illustration) were involved in an accident that was not
severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CHILD RESTRAINT
Child restraint precautions
Lexus strongly urges the use of child restraint systems for
children small enough to use them.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of a child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. See “Seat belts” on page 105 for details.
CAUTION
For effective protection in automobile accidents and
sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint system depending
on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint
system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between you and the
vehicle’s interior.
Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint
system which conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the
front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the
rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or
serious injury if a rear–facing child restraint system
is put on the front seat.
Unless it is unavoidable, do not put a forward–facing
child restraint system on the front seat.
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow the child to lean against the front door
or around the front door even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side
airbags inflate, because the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
Make sure you have complied with all installation
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and that the system is properly
secured.
Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must
itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap
portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully
consult
the
manufacturer’s
instructions
which
accompany the child restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system
following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate
age and size of the child for the child restraint system.
Install the child restraint system correctly following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions
are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
CAUTION
Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the
front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the
rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or
serious injury if a rear–facing child restraint system
is put on the front seat.
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow the child to lean against the front door
or around the front door even if the child is seated in
a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side
airbags inflate, because the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
After installing the child restraint system, make sure
it is secured in place according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If it is not restrained securely, it may
cause death or serious injury to the child in the event
of a sudden stop or accident.
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with
the seat belt or place it somewhere other than in the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or accident.
Unless it is unavoidable, do not put a forward–facing
child restraint system on the front seat.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Types of child restraint system
(B) Convertible seat
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
depending on the child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
16R310
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of
a child restraint system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see
“Using a top strap” on page 141.
(C) Booster seat
The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle
may also be used. See “Installation with the child restraint
lower anchorages” on page 144 for instructions.
(A) Infant seat
16R311
16R126
INSTALLATION WITH 3–POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
(A) Infant seat installation
16R062a
16R126
CAUTION
An infant seat is used in rear–facing position only.
Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat because the force of the rapid
inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to the child.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R291
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
16R341
1
Same position
2
Same angle
When installing a child restraint system in the rear
center position, align both seat cushions to the same
position and align both seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained and this may cause death or
serious injuries in a collision.
16R129
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant
seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer
and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
16R130
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock
mode before letting the belt retract.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from injury. Contact your Lexus
dealer immediately . Do not use the child restraint
system until the seat belt is fixed.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R131
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the infant seat securely.
16R132
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
(B) Convertible seat installation
16R133
4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle–release button
and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child
passenger.
16R310
A convertible seat is used in forward–facing or rear–facing
position depending on the child’s age and size. When
installing, follow the manufacturer’s instruction about the
applicable child’s age and size as well as directions for
installing the child restraint system.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R069
16R046
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
Never put a rear–facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat because the force of the rapid
inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to the child.
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow the child to lean against the front door
or around the front door even if the child is seated in
a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side
airbags inflate, because the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
16R292
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
16R342
1
Same position
2
Same angle
When installing a child restraint system in the rear
center position, align both seat cushions to the same
position and align both seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained and this may cause death or
serious injuries in a collision.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R312
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the
convertible seat following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care
not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from injury. Contact your Lexus
dealer immediately. Do not use the child restraint
system until the seat belt is fixed.
16R313
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in
the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
16R314
3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
16R315
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(C) Booster seat installation
16R138
4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle–release
button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older
child passenger.
16R139
A booster seat is used in forward–facing position only.
16R052
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force of the
deploying front passenger airbag could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
16R343
1
Same position
2
Same angle
When installing a child restraint system in the rear
center position, align both seat cushions to the same
position and align both seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained and this may cause death or
serious injuries in a collision.
Do not allow the child to lean against the front door
or around the front door even if the child is seated in
a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side
airbags inflate, because the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R140
Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on a child’s hips as possible.
For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt
under child’s arm.
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder
belt through or around the booster seat and child following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page 105 for details.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should
be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off
child’s shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the
amount of protection in an accident and cause
serious injuries in a collision.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from injury. Contact your Lexus
dealer immediately. Do not use the child restraint
system until the seat belt is fixed.
Using a top strap
16R141
16R272
2. To remove the child restraint system, press the
buckle–release button and allow the belt to retract.
Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system
that requires the use of a top strap.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
16R376
1
Symbol mark
2
Anchor brackets
Use the anchor bracket on the rear of the seatback to attach
the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for outside rear seating
positions.
This symbol mark indicates the location of user ready anchor
brackets.
16R274
1. Remove the head restraint and open the anchor bracket
cover.
16R275
16R205
2. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.
3. Replace the head restraint.
Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top
strap.
Be sure to close the cover when the anchor bracket is not in
use.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child
restraint system” on page 127.
CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check
that the child restraint system is securely by pushing
and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
16R276
The lower anchorages for the child restraint system
interfaced with the FMVSS225 specification are installed
in the rear seat.
16R348
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the
seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.
Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225
specification can be fixed with these anchorages. In this case,
it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat
belt on the vehicle.
Type A
Type A:
1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and
seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower
anchorages below the tag in the seatback.
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages
and tighten the lower straps.
Type B:
1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and
seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower
anchorages below the tag in the seatback.
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
16R349
If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be
anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top
strap” on page 141.)
For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual
equipped with each product.
Type B
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
When using the lower anchorages for the child
restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular
objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is
not caught.
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
The microcomputer can memorize the position of the driver’s
seat. Two different driving position profiles can be entered into
the computer’s memory.
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer.
Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can
only be done when the ignition key is in the “ON” position and
the selector lever is in the “P” position.
When using the lower anchorages for a child restraint
system, ensure that the seat is moved to the
rear–most position, with the seatback close to the
child restraint system.
Setting the driving position
After securing the child restraint system, never slide
or recline the seat.
Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat
if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front
seats. This can cause death or serious injury to the
child and front passenger in case of sudden braking
or a collision.
16R058a
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1” or “2”
until the signal beeps.
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the
computer’s memory.
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining
button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position
and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and
the new position will be set.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position,
the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
Recalling the memorized position
Conditions for memorized position activation
Ignition key “ON” and selector lever in “P” position.
However, if the brake pedal is being depressed, the seat
position will not change.
Key not in ignition switch and within 30 seconds of opening
driver’s door.
If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of the
memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the
operation will stop.
To activate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”)
again.
16R059a
The driving position memory control system cannot be
operated while the vehicle is moving.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s
memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have
to be set again.
When you push button “1” or “2”, the driving position will
be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that
button.
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are
being made.
Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat
could strike the rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can
stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch, or depressing the brake
pedal.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
1–7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Theft deterrent
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
17R014
17R013
Security indicator light
To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to
sound an alarm if any of the doors or hood is forcibly
unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected while the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights, tail lights and other exterior lights.
Setting the system
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position and
remove it.
The engine immobiliser system causes the indicator light to
flash.
2. Close and lock all the doors and hood using an ignition
key or wireless remote control.
If you lock them with wireless remote control, the turn signals
flash once.*
NOTE: *The turn signals can be set not to flash. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
The flashing indicator light will remain on when all the doors
and hood are closed and locked.
3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the
system is set.
Cancelling the system
Testing the system
When you unlock any door using an ignition key or
wireless remote control, the system is cancelled.
1. Open all the windows.
If you unlock any door with wireless remote control, the turn
signals flash twice.*
NOTE: *The turn signals can be set not to flash. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
2. Set the system as described above.
The front doors should be locked with the ignition key or
wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light
starts flashing.
3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside.
Activating the system
The system should activate the alarm.
The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are
operated:
4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless
remote control to cancel the system.
Unlocking any door without using an ignition key or wireless
remote control.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood.
Opening the hood forcibly.
Reconnecting the battery.
If any door is unlocked and the ignition key is not in the ignition
switch during the alarm sounding, the door is automatically
locked.
To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.
Unlock the door using an ignition key or wireless remote
control.
Turn the ignition switch on.
When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated
when the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Disconnecting the battery may result in the erasure of
information you have set in the computer memory. After
reconnecting the battery, check that the memorized
data has been retained. If it has been erased, input it into
the computer once more.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
THEFT PREVENTION LABELS
(U.S.A.ONLY)
17E002
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are
approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of
vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts
from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is
applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in
destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels
intact from one part to another will be impossible.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention
labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
SECTION
2–1
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
For vehicles equipped with Navigation System,
please refer to the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
20R001d
You can adjust the brightness of the display. See page
170 for details.
NOTICE
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains
the set temperature.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running.
This air conditioning features automatic fan speed and air flow
control which automatically selects the most suitable fan
speed and air flow to control the temperature. The ignition key
must be in the “ON” position.
1
Temperature display
(in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
2
Fan speed display
3
Air flow display
4
Automatic control button
5
Temperature selector knob
6
OFF button
7
Front windshield button
8
Air intake control button
9
Air conditioning on–off button
10
Fan speed control knob
11
Air flow control button
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
20R294
Air flow selection
(a) Climate control
SETTING OPERATION – automatic control
20R004a
20R003a
2. Turn the temperature selector knob until the desired
temperature is displayed.
1. Push the “AUTO” button.
An indicator light will illuminate to show that the automatic
operation mode has been selected.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on–off of the air
conditioning and switching of the air intake between
RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically
adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
The temperature selector knob is used to set the desired
passenger compartment temperature. The temperature of air
delivered to the passenger compartment will be controlled
automatically according to the setting. The figures on the panel
indicate degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
When you adjust the temperature selector knob to maximum
cooling, the “MAX. COLD” will appear on the display and the
air intake mode will be automatically changed to
RECIRCULATE AIR mode.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while
operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the
depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be
adjusted automatically.
Push the “OFF” button to turn the air conditioning system off.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SETTING OPERATION – manual control
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed
while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to
the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to
be adjusted automatically.
If manual air flow selection is desired –
4
Floor/Windshield – Air flows mainly from the floor vents
and windshield vents. Unheated air is also delivered
through the side vents during heating.
If quick heating or cooling is desired –
Turn the temperature selector knob until “MAX. HOT” or “MAX.
COLD” appears on the display.
When the “MAX. COLD” is selected, the air intake is
automatically set to RECIRCULATED AIR mode.
If manual fan speed control is desired –
20R005b
20R006c
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected
manually by pushing the “MODE” button. The function of each
mode is as follows:
1
Panel – Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents.
2
Bi–level – Air flows from both the floor vents and the
instrument panel vents.
3
Floor – Air flows mainly from the floor vents. Unheated
air is also delivered through the side vents during heating.
1
Toward low fan speed
2
Toward high fan speed
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by turning the
fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more
air is delivered. Pushing the “OFF” button turns off the fan.
To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed setting.
If manual switching of air intake is desired –
If manual on–off of the air conditioning is desired –
Push the “A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push
it again to turn the air conditioning off.
The air conditioning does not work if the outside temperature
is lowered down to around 0C (32F).
20R007a
The air intake control button is used to switch the air intake
between the OUTSIDE AIR mode and RECIRCULATED AIR
mode. The indicator on the switch shows which mode is
selected.
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or
removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air
conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve
fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year–round
automatic temperature control including cooling and
dehumidifying operation.
If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the
indicator of the “A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the
“A/C” button blinks even when the “A/C” button is pushed
again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus
dealer.
With the indicator on – For RECIRCULATED AIR mode
With the indicator off – For OUTSIDE AIR mode
For normal use, it is best to keep the setting to OUTSIDE AIR
mode. If RECIRCULATED AIR mode is used during heating,
the windows will fog up more easily.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes extremely high, the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode is automatically selected. This is
not a malfunction. When the engine coolant temperature is
lowered, the previous mode resumes.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode
may change automatically to OUTSIDE AIR mode depending
on the condition of the air conditioning system.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting
Pushing the windshield air flow button turns on the
defroster–linked air conditioning. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly.
Pushing the windshield air flow button once again returns the
air flow mode to the last one used.
20R008a
To remove interior fog on the windshield –
Push the windshield air flow button.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield –
1. Turn the temperature selector knob at the maximum
temperature.
2. Push the windshield air flow button.
3. Turn the fan speed control knob to obtain a maximum air
flow.
4. Leave the air conditioning on–off button off.
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is
automatically set. This setting clears the front view more
quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
CAUTION
Do not use the windshield air flow button during cooled
air operation in extremely humid weather.
The
difference between the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface
of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.
(c) Air filter
The air filter may clog after long use which will reduce the air
flow. However, you can inspect the filter easily.
When you inspect and replace the air filter, be sure to turn off
the fan.
20R040b
1. Open the glove box and remove the two covers.
20R452
2. Take out the filter case.
20R453
3. Remove the filter from the filter case.
4. Inspect the filter on the surface.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
If it is just moderately dusty, it may be cleaned by blowing
compressed air from the lower surface. Do not wash or oil the
filter.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced. To maintain the air
conditioning efficiency, replace the air filter according to the
maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement
/ Scheduled Maintenance”.)
INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed properly in position.
The use of air conditioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and
then affect air conditioning performance.
(d) Operating tips
Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are
not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard
vents. (See “Side vents” and “Rear vents”.)
To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After
the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.
When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust
thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake
control button be left to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan
speed control button be pressed to anywhere except the
“OFF” button.
If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in
windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air
intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside
passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the
vehicle interior.
Side vents
20R009e
The side vents may be opened or closed as shown.
Rear vents
20R042
The rear vents may be opened or closed as shown.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
2–2
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Audio
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
For vehicles equipped with Navigation System,
please refer to the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
AUDIO SYSTEM
Quick reference for your audio system
20R010d
The “CD” button works only when your Lexus is equipped with a compact disc changer.
1
Function buttons
1 – 6:
Station selector buttons
(See page 173 for details.)
SCAN: Scan tuning
(See page 174 for details.)
P·SCAN:
Preset scan tuning
(See page 174 for details.)
RAND: Random access
(See page 183 for details.)
SCAN: Scan selection
(See page 181 for details.)
D·SCAN: Disc scan selection
(See page 181 for details.)
4
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 168 for details.)
5
Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 175 for details.)
6
Radio mode:
Frequency tuning
(See page 172 or 174 for details.)
Tape mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 177 for details.)
2
Display of functions in TAPE mode
: Side change
(See page 176 for details.)
DOLBY NR
(See page 175 for details.)
:
:
Rewinding or Fast forwarding
(See page 176 for details.)
RPT:
Automatic repeat
(See page 176 for details.)
SKIP:
Automatic skip of blank portions of tape
(See page 176 for details.)
3
Display of functions in compact disc mode
Disc selection
(See page 180 for details.)
:
:
Reversing or Fast forwarding
(See page 182 for details.)
RPT:
Automatic repeat
(See page 182 for details.)
Compact disc mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 182 for details.)
7
Mode selectors
(See page 169 for details.)
8
Cassette tape slot
(See page 175 for details.)
9
Brightness button:
Adjusting brightness of display
(See page 170 for details.)
10
Mute button
11
Sound control knob
(See page 170 for details.)
(See page 168 for details.)
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Using your audio system: some basics
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
Your audio system works when the ignition key is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
20R043a
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
(a) Turning the system on and off
Push the “MUTE” button to decrease the volume
momentarily.
To return to its original volume, push the same button again.
When the audio system is turned on, the mute is always off
regardless of the previous mode.
20R011
Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn
this knob to adjust the volume.
The system turns on in the last mode used.
20R012b
Push the “AM”, “FM1/2”, “TAPE” or “CD” button to turn on
that mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to
another.
20R057
The applicable functions are shown in the lowest part of
the display. Push the switch just below to turn on each
function.
If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc
player does not turn on.
You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette
tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette
tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on
again.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(b) Brightness buttons
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume
of another.
20R044
20R014a
1
Darken
2
Brighten
The buttons adjust the brightness of the display. Each
time you push the button on the “ ” side, the display
becomes bright. Each time you push the button on the “ ”
side, the display becomes dark.
Each time you push the sound control knob, the display
changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and
balance, turn the knob.
(c) Tone and balance
BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones.
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely
determined by the mix of the treble, mid–range, and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid–range,
and bass.
MId: Adjusts mid–pitched tones.
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the
front and rear sound levels is also important.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left
speakers.
TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones.
FAd: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear
speakers.
(d) Your radio antenna
(e) Your cassette player
The antenna automatically extends when the radio and ignition
are turned on and retracts when either is turned off.
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to
the right.
CAUTION
NOTICE
Before extending the antenna, confirm that no one is
close enough to get injured.
Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not
insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure it is
retracted before driving your vehicle through an
automatic car wash.
When cleaning the inside of the left quarter window,
be careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.
Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or
metallic type) on the left quarter window may affect
the reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the
installation of the window tint, consult with your
Lexus dealer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(f) Your compact disc changer
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
20R015b
If your Lexus is equipped with a compact disc changer, it can
play selected discs or continuously play all the discs set in the
magazine.
20R016b
Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the display.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact
disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact
discs into the magazine.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
(b) Presetting a station
20R017a
Push this button on the right side to step up the station
band or on the left side to step down.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If
the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of
channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating
noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio
switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST”
disappears from the display.
20R018a
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1–6 ) and hold
it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button
and the button number ( 1–6 ) appears on the display.
Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To
change the preset station to a different one, follow the same
procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
20R020b
20R019a
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1–6 ) for the station you want
briefly. The button number ( 1–6 ) and station frequency
appear on the display.
Manual tuning: Push the “TUNE SEEK” button briefly. Each
time you push the button, the radio will step up or down to
another frequency.
Seek tuning: Push the “TUNE SEEK” button and hold it until
you hear a beep. The radio will begin seeking up or down for
a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception.
Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched
out one after another.
To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button.
“SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next
station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a
second time.
To scan the preset stations: Push the “P·SCAN” button.
“P·SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the
next preset station up the band, stay there for a few seconds,
and then move to the next preset station. To select a station,
push the “P·SCAN” button a second time.
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
20R022a
20R289
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button.
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should
be to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette
tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display.
If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the
cassette player, the player will automatically adapt to it and
“METAL” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the eject button.
Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a
tape that was recorded with Dolby* B or C Noise Reduction,
push the button by the double–D symbol until the appropriate
symbol appears on the display.
The Dolby B NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. The
Dolby C NR mode reduces tape noise by another 10 dB or
about 20 dB total. For best sound reproduction, select the
same NR mode that was used to record the tape.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button until
the symbol disappears from the display.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double–D
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
symbol
Corporation.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(b) Manual program selection
20R023a
“Program” button: Push the “ ” button to select the
other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side
is currently selected (“” indicates top side, “” indicates
bottom side).
“Rewind” button: Push the “” button to rewind a tape.
“REW” appears on the display.
To stop rewinding, push the same button or “TAPE” button.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “” button to fast forward
a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE”
button.
(c) Automatic program selection
20R290
“RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the
current program.
Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the
program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 4 seconds of blank space between
programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
“SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward
past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at
the end of cassettes.
Push the “SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any
blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next
program. To cancel it, push the button once again.
20R026a
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to nine programs at a time.
“RPT”, “SKIP” and “Automatic program selection”
features: These features may not work well with some spoken
word, live or classical recordings.
Push this button on the right side to skip forward. “FF” and the
number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
Push this button on the left side to skip backward. Push the
button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on
the display.
If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Compact disc player operation
The compact disc player is an optional accessory that your
vehicle is pre–wired to accept. Although your audio system
has a “CD” button, your vehicle may or may not be equipped
with a compact disc player. Please contact your dealer for
additional details if you would like to have the optional compact
disc player installed.
20R045
(a) Inserting compact discs
2. Push this button to eject the magazine.
20R027
20L021
1. Pull the lever and open the glove box door.
3. Pull out the tray while pushing the lock release button.
20L022
When the magazine is set completely, the system will be in a
“Load” cycle for approximately 20 seconds while the system
searches for discs in the magazine. Upon completion of this
cycle, the compact disc unit will be ready to play. If the “CD”
button is pushed during the “Load” cycle, “LOAD” appears on
the display until the system has completed the load cycle, after
which the system will begin normal play.
CAUTION
4. Put a disc on the tray with its label face down and push
the tray back into the magazine.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
20R031b
5. Insert the magazine into the player as indicated by the
arrow head on the magazine and close the glove box door.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(b) Playing a compact disc
20R032b
Push the “CD” button if the magazine is already loaded in
the player.
“CD” appears on the display.
The discs set in the magazine are played continuously, starting
with disc number 1. The disc number of the disc currently being
played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the
program appear on the display.
When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc
starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc
starts again.
The player will skip any empty disc trays.
(c) Selecting a desired disc
20R033a
Push the “DISC” button to select the disc number.
Push the button several times until the desired disc number
appears on the display. When you release the button, the
player will start playing the selected disc from the first track.
(d) Searching for a desired track
20R034a
(e) Searching for a desired disc
20R035a
Push the “SCAN” button.
Push the “D·SCAN” button.
“SCAN” will appear on the display. The compact disc player
will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To
select a track, push the “SCAN” button a second time. If the
player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning at
track 1.
With “D·SCAN” on the display, the program at the beginning of
each disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening
to the program of your choice, push the “D·SCAN” button a
second time.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
After all the discs in the magazine are scanned in one pass, the
scan function is cancelled.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(f) Selecting a desired track
20R036b
“TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
“Fast forward” button:
Push the “” button and hold it to fast forward the disc.
When you release the button, the compact disc player will
resume playing from that position.
“Reverse” button:
Push the “” button and hold it to reverse the disc. When
you release the button, the compact disc player will resume
playing.
(g) Repeating a track or a disc
20R037a
“RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features — you can either
replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track: Push the “RPT” button briefly while the
track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the display. When the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button again to turn off the
repeat feature.
Repeating a disc: Push the “RPT” button until you hear a
beep. “D·RPT” will appear on the display. The player will
repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the
disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track
of the disc and replay. This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
(h) Random playing
(i) If the player malfunctions
If “WAIT” appears on the display, audio signals of the disc
cannot be read or the system has trouble. Push the “CD”
button once again.
20R038b
“RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can
either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a
specific compact disc in random order.
Random playing for the tracks on a disc: Push the “RAND”
button briefly. “RAND” will appear on the display and play the
disc you are listening to in random order.
Random playing for all the tacks in the magazine: Push the
“RAND” button until you hear a beep. “D·RAND” will appear on
the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the
discs in the magazine in random order. To turn off the random
feature, push “RAND” a second time.
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the
button to reset.
If the player does not operate, check that the disc surface is not
soiled or damaged. If the disc is O.K., the following causes are
possible.
Condensation may have occurred on the internal
mechanism of the automatic changer. Open the cover to let
the air circulate.
The temperature of the player’s internal mechanism is
raised because of high external temperature. Remove the
magazine from the player to cool it.
If the player still does not operate, take it to your Lexus dealer.
Car audio system operating hints
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio
system.
Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or
compact disc magazine into the tape slot or changer.
The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Radio reception
AM
Usually, the problem with radio reception does not mean there
is a problem with your radio – it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
Fading – AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper
atmosphere – especially at night. These reflected signals can
interfere with those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal
will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Station interference – When a reflected signal and a signal
received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult
to hear the broadcast.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do
not indicate a problem with your radio:
Static – AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical
noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical
motors. This results in static.
FM
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
Fading and drifting stations – Generally, the effective range
of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you
may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance
from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by
distortion.
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Multi–path – FM signals are reflective, making it possible for
two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering – These occur when signals are blocked
by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping – If the FM signal you are listening to is
interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
Use high–quality cassettes:
Low–quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto–reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled
in the cassette player.
Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
20L037
Caring for your compact disc player and discs
Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7
in.) discs only.
Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc
player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to
cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact
disc player skip.
If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not
hear any sound even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Remove the magazine from the
player and wait until it dries.
Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The
following products may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy–protected CD
CD–R (CD–Recordable)
CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)
CD–ROM
CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
20E424
Special shaped discs
20E423
Labeled discs
NOTICE
20E425
Low quality discs
To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use
special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as
those shown in the illustrations.
20L038
Correct
Wrong
Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set
them into the magazine. Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly
on the shiny side.
20L039
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint–free cloth
that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not
use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static device.
Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
3–1
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Three–way catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle skid control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited–slip differentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
203
206
211
212
216
216
217
THREE–WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the
three–way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other
damage, observe the following precautions:
Use only unleaded gasoline.
31R077
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating
an excessive load on the three–way catalytic
converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
Three–way catalytic converters are emission control
devices installed in the exhaust system.
Avoid racing the engine.
Do not push–start or pull–start your vehicle.
It looks somewhat like a muffler, but its purpose is to reduce
pollutants in the exhaust gas.
Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is
moving.
CAUTION
Keep your engine in good running order.
Malfunctions in the engine electrical system,
electronic ignition system or fuel system could cause
an extremely high three–way catalytic converter
temperature.
Keep people and combustible materials away from
the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything
that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, take your vehicle in for a check–up as
soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer
knows your vehicle and its three–way catalytic
converter system best.
To ensure that the three–way catalytic converter and
the entire emission control system operate properly,
your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections
required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION
CAUTION
Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains
carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless
gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose
connections. The system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change
in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked
immediately.
Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area
except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or
out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this
a particularly dangerous situation.
Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with
the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do
so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating
or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.
Keep the back door closed while driving. An open or
unsealed back door may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s
ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the
windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other
obstructions.
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with
the windows open and the back door closed. Have
the cause immediately located and corrected.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, head restraint height
and steering wheel angle.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.
Remember to check that the service reminder indicators
function when turning the key to “ON”, and check the fuel
gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.
IGNITION SWITCH WITH STEERING
LOCK
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open
the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.*
NOTE: *The volume or interval of beep sound can be
changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
31R080
“START” – Starter motor on. The key will return to the
“ON” position when released.
For starting tips, see page 195.
“ON” – Engine on and all accessories on.
This is the normal driving position.
NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON” position if the engine
is not running. The battery will discharge and the
electronic ignition system could be damaged.
“ACC” – Accessories such as the radio operate, but the
engine is off.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
PARKING BRAKE
31R081
31R004
“LOCK” – Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.
The ignition key can be removed only at this position.
You must push in the key to turn it from “ACC” to the “LOCK”
position. The selector lever must be put in the “P” position
before turning the key to the “LOCK” position.
To set: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right
foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left
foot.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobiliser system is
automatically set. See “Engine immobiliser system” on page
12.
To release: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your
right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left
foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal
will follow it to the released position.
When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the
“LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while
turning the key gently.
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, turn the key only to “ACC”.
Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully
released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
HOW TO START THE ENGINE
If the engine stalls ...
Before cranking
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal
starting.
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
If the engine will not start ...
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page 238.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine
while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A
starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if
the selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving
off.
Starting the engine
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in
“Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system in your engine automatically controls the
proper air–fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot
engine as follows:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by
turning the key to “START”. Release it when the engine starts.
2. After the engine runs for about 10 seconds, you are ready
to drive.
If the weather is below freezing, let the engine warm up for a
few minutes before driving. Do not leave the vehicle while the
engine is warming up.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
2
For selecting either a three–speed or four–speed
transmission.
Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to
minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This
means you can only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition switch in “ON”
position and the lock release button pressed in). ()
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift the transmission by pushing and releasing the
overdrive switch, engine braking will not be enabled
because the cruise control is not cancelled. For ways to
decrease the vehicle speed, see page 205.
3
30R041
Overdrive switch
Shift position indicator
The shift position is also displayed on the instrument
cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (with overdrive on)
1
Lock release button
With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while holding the lock release button
in. (The ignition switch must be in the
“ON” position.)
Shift while holding the lock release
button in.
Shift normally.
2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking
Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in
the following parts.
(a) Overdrive switch
(a) Overdrive switch
(b) Normal driving
(c) Using engine braking
(d) Using the “2” and “L” positions
(e) Backing up
31R042
(f) Parking
(g) Good driving practice
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position
(i) Driving in snow mode
You can select either a third gear (with overdrive off) or fourth
gear (with overdrive on) by pushing this switch.
To turn the overdrive off, push the switch. The “O/D OFF”
indicator light should come on. To turn the overdrive on again,
push the switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicator light should go
off.
Always drive your vehicle with the overdrive on for better fuel
economy and quieter driving.
If the engine is turned off when the overdrive is off and
restarted, the overdrive will automatically be on.
When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift
the transmission by pushing and releasing the overdrive
switch, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise
control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 205.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(b) Normal driving
31R044
31R043
1
“P” (Park) position
2
“N” (Neutral) position
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How to start the
engine” on page 195.
The transmission must be in “P” or “N”. The engine will not start
in “R”, “2”, “L” or “D” position even if the ignition key is turned
to “START”.
2. For starting your vehicle in sand, mud, ice or snow, set
the snow mode. For details, see “(i) Driving in snow
mode” on page 202.
1
Brake pedal
2
“D” (Drive) position
3. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the
selector lever to “D”.
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting.
4. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress
the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.
The vehicle will start in the first gear and automatically shift to
the most suitable gear for the running conditions, such as the
vehicle speed, hill climbing, hard towing, etc. However, while
the engine coolant temperature is low and the vehicle is
traveling at low speed, the transmission will not shift into the
overdrive gear even with the overdrive on.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the automatic
transmission system will select the most suitable gear for the
running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
(c) Using engine braking
If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. The transmission will
automatically downshift to third, second or first gear, according
to the vehicle speed.
31R045
If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,
see “(c) Using engine braking”.
To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the
transmission in the way described below:
1
Push the overdrive switch. (This is effective only when
you are driving in the “D” position.) The “O/D OFF”
indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on and
the transmission will downshift to third gear.
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift the transmission by pushing and releasing the
overdrive switch, engine braking will not be enabled
because the cruise control is not cancelled. If you need
to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 205.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
2
3
Shift into the “2” position. The transmission will downshift
to second gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or
lower than the following speed, and stronger engine
braking will be enabled.
(d) Using the “2” and “L” positions
Two–wheel drive models
113 km/h (70 mph)
Four–wheel drive models
106 km/h (65 mph)
With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, you can start the vehicle in
motion as with the lever in “D”.
Shift into the “L” position. The transmission will downshift
to first gear when the vehicle speed drops down to or
lower than the following speed, and maximum engine
braking will be enabled.
Two–wheel drive models
51 km/h (31 mph)
Four–wheel drive models
48 km/h (29 mph)
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
The “2” and “L” positions are used for strong engine braking as
described previously.
With the selector lever in “2”, the vehicle will start in first gear
and automatically shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in
first gear.
NOTICE
Be careful not to over–rev the engine. Watch the
tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the
red zone. The approximate maximum allowable
speed for each position is given below for your
reference.
Two–wheel drive models:
“2” . . . . . . . . . 125 km/h (78 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . 70 km/h (43 mph)
Four–wheel drive models:
“2” . . . . . . . . . 117 km/h (73 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . 65 km/h (40 mph)
Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long
time in the “2” or “L” position. This may cause severe
automatic transmission damage from overheating.
To prevent such damage, “D” position should be
used in hill climbing or hard towing.
(e) Backing up
(f) Parking
31R046
1
Brake pedal
2
“R” (Reverse) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
31R047
1
2
3
Brake pedal
Parking brake pedal
“P” (Park) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the parking brake fully to securely apply the
parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION
While the vehicle is moving, never attempt to move the
selector lever into “P” under any circumstances.
Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control
may result.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
(g) Good driving practice
If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between
the third and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope,
the overdrive should be turned off. Be sure to turn the switch
on immediately after climbing the slope.
When towing a trailer, in order to maintain efficient engine
braking and electrical charging performance, do not use
overdrive.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out
of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from “P” position even
though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override
button. For instructions, see “If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever” on page 259.
(i) Driving in snow mode
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped
with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from
creeping.
31R048
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold
the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the
vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause
the transmission to overheat.
In the snow mode, the transmission system shifts up from
the second gear.
To set the driving pattern to the snow mode, push the switch.
In the “ECT SNOW” indicator on the instrument cluster is on.
To cancel the snow mode, push the switch again. The “ECT
SNOW” indicator light will go off when the snow mode is
cancelled.
If the engine is turned off with the snow mode is on, the snow
mode is cancelled when the engine is restarted.
CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a
desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great
speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise
control.
CAUTION
To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy
or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow–covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to
the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise
control then downshift the transmission to use
engine braking to slow down.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Turning on the system
Setting operation
31R094
31R093
To operate the cruise control, push the main switch. This turns
the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster
shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed.
Another push on the switch will turn the system completely off.
When the ignition key is turned off, the main switch is also
automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push
the main switch again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep
the main switch off when not using the cruise control.
Each function is described below.
1
Setting at a desired speed.
The transmission must be in “D” before you set the cruise
control speed.
Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the “SET/COAST” direction and release it. This
sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off
the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration – for example,
when passing – depress the accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset
speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled.
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than
these reasons, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer at the earliest opportunity.
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction quickly.
However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and
then press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction.
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed
is attained. While the lever is held downward, the vehicle
speed will gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction quickly.
However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal
and then press the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction.
Even if you turn off the overdrive switch with the cruise control
on, engine braking will not be applied because the cruise
control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset
to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the
brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is
cancelled.
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or
by depressing the brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
“RES/ACC” direction will restore the speed set prior to
cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below
about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Cruise control failure warning
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes
when using the cruise control, push the main switch to turn the
system off and then push it again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some
trouble in the cruise control system.
The indicator light does not come on.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
(Two–wheel drive models)
The traction control system automatically helps prevent
the spinning of front wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the system
automatically turns on.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Lexus dealer and have your
Lexus inspected.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of
the vehicle and power against front wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction control system is
in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed
or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the
road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle
should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.
Normal driving mode
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
Traction control off mode
31R015a
31R016d
Slip indicator light
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it
can operate when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is
started. This means that the traction control system is in the
self–check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following
conditions occur:
The system controls the spinning of the front wheels. At this
time, the slip indicator light blinks.
You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by
operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
If your wheels get stuck in a ditch when you are driving on
a severe off road and sand, turn off the traction control
system. This system that controls engine performance
interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.
To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on.
To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch once again.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.
“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on for a few seconds when
the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It will come on again when
you push the “TRAC OFF” switch to turn off the system.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key
is turned to “ON”.
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The indicator light remains on after the ignition is turned on.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
The indicator light comes on with the normal driving mode
while driving.
“VSC” warning light
31R055
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle skid control system or traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the vehicle skid control
system and traction control system do not work. However, as
conventional braking operates when applied, there is no
problem to continue your driving.
The warning light comes on while driving.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Normal driving mode
(Four–wheel drive modes)
The traction control system automatically helps prevent
the spinning of 4 wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the system
automatically turns on.
31R015a
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of
the vehicle and power against 4 wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction control system is
in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed
or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the
road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle
should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.
Slip indicator light
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it
can operate when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is
started. This means that the traction control system is in the
self–check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following
conditions occur:
The system controls the spinning of the 4 wheels. At this
time, the slip indicator light blinks.
You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by
operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
“VSC” warning light
31R055
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle skid control system or traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the vehicle skid control
system and traction control system do not work. However, as
conventional braking operates when applied, there is no
problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
The warning light comes on while driving.
VEHICLE SKID CONTROL SYSTEM
The vehicle skid control system helps provide
comprehensive control of the systems such as anti–lock
brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This
system automatically controls the brakes and engine to
help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on
a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel
abruptly.
Only use tires of specified size.
The size,
manufacture, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires
should be the same. If you use the tires other than
specified, or different type or size, the vehicle skid
control system may not function correctly. When
replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Lexus
dealer.
This system activates when the vehicle speed is about more
than 15 km/h (9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is
started. This means that the system is in the self–check mode
but does not indicate a malfunction.
31R015a
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the vehicle skid control
system. Even if the system is operating, it can not
completely eliminate the possibility of an accident.
Always keep safe driving in mind, as reckless driving
increases the risk of an accident. If the slip indicator
light blinks, sounding an alarm, special care should
be taken while driving.
Slip indicator light
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator
light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
“VSC” warning light
31R055
BRAKE SYSTEM
The tandem master cylinder brake system is a hydraulic
system with two separate sub–systems. If either sub–system
should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be
harder to press, and your stopping distance will be longer.
Also, the brake system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake
system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle skid control system or the traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the vehicle skid control
system and traction control system do not work. However, as
conventional braking operates when applied, there is no
problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
The warning light comes on while driving.
Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to power–assist the
brakes. If the engine should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal pedal pressure. There
is enough reserved vacuum for one or two stops but no more!
CAUTION
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved
vacuum.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes
will still work. But you will have to push the pedal
hard, much harder than normal. And your braking
distance will be longer.
Anti–lock brake system
The anti–lock brake system is designed to help prevent
lock–up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking
on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing
directional stability and steering performance of the
vehicle under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the
anti–lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to
let the anti–lock brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a
panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti–lock brake system becomes operative after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately
10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle
decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as
on the manhole cover, the steel plate under the construction,
joints in the bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the
anti–lock brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle is started. This means that the anti–lock
brake system is in the self–check mode, and does not indicate
a malfunction.
When the anti–lock brake system is activated, the
following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a
malfunction of the system:
You may hear the anti–lock brake system operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle
body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor
sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is
stopped.
At the end of the anti–lock brake system activation, the
brake pedal may move a little forward.
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti–lock brake system:
Although the anti–lock brake system assists in
providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive
with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because
there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness
of steering wheel operation even with the anti–lock
brake system on.
If tires grip performance exceeds its capability, or if
hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the
rain, the anti–lock brake system does not provide
vehicle control.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Anti–lock brake system is not designed to shorten the
stopping distance: Always drive at the moderate speed
and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Compared with vehicles without an anti–lock
brake system, your vehicle may require a longer
stopping distance in the following cases:
Driving on rough, gravel or snow–covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
“ABS” warning light
31R017a
Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or
has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate
pressure: The anti–lock brake system detects vehicle
speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’
turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified
may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting
in a longer stopping distance.
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and the vehicle skid
control system do not operate, but the brake system still
operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
Drum–in–disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding–down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding–down.
Brake assist system
If you slam the brakes on such as in an emergency or
apply the brakes more firmly than usual such as when
descending the hill with the designated number of
occupants in the vehicle, the brake assist system
provides more powerful braking.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be
applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle
has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS
warning light” on page 48 or 214.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT
INDICATORS
LIMITED–SLIP DIFFERENTIALS
(Four–wheel drive models only)
Your Lexus is equipped with a limited–slip center differential
(transfer) and some models are equipped with a limited–slip
rear differential as optional.
31R018a
The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes
give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the
extent that replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the
brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the
pads are not replaced when needed.
If one wheel – either front or rear – begins to spin, the transfer
(limited–slip center differential) is designed to aid traction by
automatically transmitting driving force to the wheels on the
other drive axle. It transmits driving force to the front wheels
if a rear wheel spins, and to the rear wheels if a front wheel
spins.
Four–wheel drive models with limited–slip rear differential: If
one rear wheel begins to spin, the limited–slip rear differential
is designed to aid traction by automatically transmitting driving
force to the other rear wheel. If you are not sure whether your
vehicle is equipped with a limited–slip rear differential, you can
ask your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by a jack. The vehicle could be driven off the
jack and could pose a danger or result in serious injury.
NOTICE
Use only a spare tire of the same size, construction and
load capacity as the original tires on your Lexus
because damage to the limited–slip differential could
possibly occur with another tire type.
TYPES OF TIRES
Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped
with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high–speed capability tires best suited to
highway driving under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance
as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on
snow–covered or icy roads. For driving on snow–covered or
icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow
tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow
and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well
as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow.
Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
Do not mix summer and all season tires on your
vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the
sizes different from the originals.
SECTION
3–2
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving tips
Off–road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break–in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off–road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
220
221
221
222
223
225
226
227
235
OFF–ROAD VEHICLE
PRECAUTIONS
32R001
CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize
the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is
moving.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all
possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has
higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to
the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of
performing in a wide variety of off–road applications.
Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of
gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design
feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to
rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. An advantage
of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road
allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars
any more than low–slung sports cars designed to perform
satisfactorily under off–road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.
Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the
vehicle’s center of gravity.
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of
its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is
more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary
passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have
better control.
When driving off–road or in rugged terrain, do not
drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s
suspension and chassis.
Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes.
Driving straight up or straight down is preferred.
Your vehicle (or any similar off–road vehicle) can tip
over sideways much more easily than forward or
backward.
BREAK–IN PERIOD
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
You need not follow a break–in schedule with your new Lexus.
But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles)
can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast
or slow.
Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).
OPERATION IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ...
First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded
and minimum octane rating).
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS
CONDITIONS
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you
much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp–edged objects and other
road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire
damage resulting in tire bursts.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a
bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch
the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking
brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block
the wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get
the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.
If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are
probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while
lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake
applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the
road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is
fully released and that the parking brake reminder
light is off.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the
engine is running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear,
and poor fuel economy.
To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed
and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and not work
properly. See page 199.
Be
careful
when
accelerating,
upshifting,
downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The
abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden
acceleration or engine braking, could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the
legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h
(85 mph) unless your vehicle has high–speed
capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle are high–speed
capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are
wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer
stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will
not hold the vehicle securely.
OFF–ROAD DRIVING
PRECAUTIONS
When driving your vehicle off–road, please observe the
following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to
help prevent the closure of areas to off–road vehicles.
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where off–road vehicles are
permitted to travel.
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before
entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers
and signs that restrict travel.
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your
vehicle off–road, consult the following organizations.
State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
State Motor Vehicle Bureau
Recreational Vehicle Clubs
U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize
the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take
unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving
off–road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure
your hands. Keep both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet,
driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to
prevent damage to roads.
Always check your brakes for effectiveness
immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or
snow.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand,
rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from the
underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials
trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown
or fire could occur.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is
moving.
When driving off–road or in rugged terrain, do not
drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s
suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
If driving through water, such as when crossing
shallow streams, first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive
slowly and avoid deep water.
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that
water damage to the engine or other components
does not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe
engine damage.
Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings,
causing rusting and premature failure, and may also
enter the differentials, transmission and transfer
case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums
and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system components.
Always perform a maintenance inspection after each
day of off–road driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled
maintenance information, refer to the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
WINTER DRIVING TIPS
Check the electronic ignition
connections or obvious damage.
Make sure you have a proper freeze protection of engine
coolant.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Your coolant must contain ethylene–glycol type coolant for a
proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. Use
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. See
“Checking the engine coolant level” on page 290 for
instructions.
system
for
loose
Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from
freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto
parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
NOTICE
When it is extremely cold, we recommend to use 60% solution
for your Lexus, to provide protection down to about –50C
(–58F). Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant
performance.
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Check the condition of the battery and cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Page 313 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.
Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to
check the battery charge level.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold
weather.
Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility
it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into “P” and block the rear
wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may
freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering
difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
See page 288 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy
summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Lexus dealer – they will be pleased to help.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you
carry some emergency equipment.
DINGHY TOWING
Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains,
window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
32R026
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four
wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger–and–load
carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability and driving
economy (fuel consumption, etc.). Your safety and satisfaction
depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious
driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you
must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Lexus warranties do
not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer
for commercial purposes. Ask your local Lexus dealer for
further details before towing.
NOTICE
Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with
platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building
supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
63R004a
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Lexus
dealer for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
Certification label
CAUTION
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
load) must not exceed 1588 kg (3500 lb.). Exceeding
this weight is dangerous.
The gross combination weight (sum of your vehicle
weight plus its load and the total trailer weight) must
not exceed 3835 kg (8450 lb.).
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight
capacities established by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine
the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch
assembly and never exceed the maximum weight
rating specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the
maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch
manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in
serious personal injuries.
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the
sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver,
passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load.
It also includes the weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from
distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles
must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.
32L002
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that
the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight,
not exceeding the maximum of 158 kg (350 lb.).
Tongue load
100 = 9 to 11%
Total trailer weight
Never load the trailer with more weight in the back
than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should
be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40%
in the rear.
Hitches
Trailer ball
If you wish to install a trailer hitch, your Lexus dealer should
be consulted.
Follow these easy steps to properly determine the correct
trailer ball for your application:
Use only a hitch which is recommended by Lexus dealer
and conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
1. Determine the correct trailer ball size for the trailer coupler.
Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.
The sizes you will most likely find stamped on the coupler are:
Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
Lexus recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever you
are not towing a trailer to reduce the possibility of additional
damage caused by the hitch if your vehicle is struck from
behind. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting holes
in the vehicle body to prevent entry of pollutants such as
exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.
Trailer class
III
II
I
Typical Trailer Ball Size
2– 5/16 in.
2
in.
1– 7/8 in.
2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to match or exceed the
gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. The trailer ball load
rating should be printed on the top of the ball.
NOTICE
Install the trailer hitch using only the position
recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body
damage.
Do not use axle–mounted hitches as they can cause
damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels
or tires.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler
height
32R007
1
2
3
4
No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer
hookup, the trailer ball setup on must be the proper height for
the coupler on the trailer.
Trailer ball load rating
Ball diameter
Shank length
Shank diameter
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the threaded ball shank
must protrude beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut
at least 2 threads. The trailer ball shank must be matched to the
ball mount hole diameter size.
32R018
1
Coupler
2
Trailer ball
Brakes and safety chains
Tires
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to
any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure
indicated below:
A safety chain must always be used between the towing
vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should cross under the
trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated.
For correct safety chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.
Tire pressure, kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Front
210 (2.1, 30)
Rear
210 (2.1, 30)
The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure
recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the
total trailer weight.
CAUTION
If the total trailer weight exceeds 450 kg (1000 lb.),
trailer brakes are required.
Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it
will lower its braking effectiveness.
Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain
securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle.
If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball,
there is possible danger of the trailer wandering over
into another lane.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Trailer lights (on some models)
Maintenance
If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent
maintenance due to the additional load.
For this
information, please refer to the scheduled maintenance
information in the “Owner’s Manual Supplement /
Scheduled Maintenance”.
32R014
Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after
approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
Pre–towing safety check
Your vehicle is equipped with a wire harness stored in the
rear end under body. Some models are fitted with a socket
for trailer lights under the rear bumper. Use either of them
to connect and operate the trailer lights. However, the trailer
lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and local
regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or
rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals
and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a
malfunction of your lights.
Break–in schedule
Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new
vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train component
(engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for
the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.
Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or
unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has an
abnormal nose–up or nose–down condition, and check for
improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other
possible causes.
Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it
cannot shift.
Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal,
state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install
required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
Trailer towing tips
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently
than when not towing. The three main causes of
vehicle–trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed
and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when
towing:
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit
your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn
to avoid the need of sudden braking.
Before starting out, check the operation of the lights and all
vehicle–trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Practice
turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away
from traffic until you learn the feel.
Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right
to move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally
opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just
turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or
prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing
to reduce the risk of an accident.
Because stopping distance may be increased,
vehicle–to–vehicle distance should be increased when
towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow
at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the
vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,
resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.
Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will
be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.
Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than
normal turning radius with your vehicle.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling
of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to
the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being
passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip
the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. If it is necessary to
reduce speed, brake slowly. Steer straight ahead. If you
make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes,
your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires
considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget
the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty of room
before changing lanes.
In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical
charging performance, do not use overdrive.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s
engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over
30C [85F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a
trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in
use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 242 of this manual.
Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put
the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a
trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing
the following:
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle
and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position, start the engine. Be
sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into the “2”, “L” or “R” position.
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull
or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower. Because instability
(swaying) of a towing vehicle–trailer combination
usually increases as the speed increases, exceeding
72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.
Slow down and downshift before descending steep
or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden
downshifts.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.
HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE
YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER
Improving fuel economy is easy—just take it easy. It will help
make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check
the pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess
weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater
fuel consumption.
Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Once the engine is
running smoothly, begin driving – but gently. Remember,
however, that on cold winter days this may take a little
longer.
Keep the automatic transmission overdrive turned on
when engine braking is not required. Driving with the
overdrive off will reduce the fuel economy. (For details, see
“Automatic transmission” on page 196.)
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you
are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start
again later.
Avoid engine over–revving. Use a gear position suitable
for the road on which you are traveling.
Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.
Stop–and–go driving wastes fuel.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a
steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need
to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through
streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from
other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also
reduce wear on your brakes.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes
premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you
drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting
the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an
extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc. This
not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Keep your vehicle tuned–up and in top shape. A dirty air
cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and
grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For
longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more
frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your
power steering and brake booster will not function
without the engine running. Also, the emission control
system operates properly only when the engine is
running.
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . .
If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
238
238
242
243
251
252
259
260
IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE
DRIVING
If your engine stalls while driving ...
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or “LOCK”, and try starting
the engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your vehicle will not start”.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work, so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT
START
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct starting procedure instructions in “How to start the
engine” on page 195 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since
your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobiliser system,
also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they
work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your
Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, the system is possibly
broken. Call your Lexus dealer. See “Keys” on page 8.
If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too
slowly –
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked,
the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c)
Jump starting” for further instruction.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside
Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See
“Foreword”.)
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do not pull– or push–start the vehicle. It may damage
the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.
Also the three–way catalytic converter may overheat
and become a fire hazard.
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not
start –
1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or “LOCK” and try starting the
engine again.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” for further instructions.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking.
If this happens, turn the key to “START” with the accelerator
pedal held down. Continue this operation for 30 seconds and
then stop cranking. Then try starting the engine with your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking,
release the key, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service
Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your
vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid
burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be followed
precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we
strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus
dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See “Foreword”.)
CAUTION
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous
and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin,
clothing, or vehicle.
If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in
your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and
flush the affected area with water immediately. Then
get immediate medical attention.
If possible,
continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
en route to the medical office.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
The gas normally produced by a battery will explode
if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump
start unless you are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
5
Discharged battery
6
Booster battery
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make
sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary
lights and accessories.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster
battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not
running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump
starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
4. Locate positive (+) and negative (–) terminals of each
battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2
3 4 ) shown in the illustration.
1
Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2
Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
3
Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative
(–) terminal of the booster battery.
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black)
cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (such
as shown in the illustration) away from the battery. Do not
connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.
CAUTION
When making the connections, to avoid serious injury,
do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the
correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at
about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order:
the negative cable and then the positive cable.
7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may
now contain sulfuric acid.
8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for
example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your
Lexus dealer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you
hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated.
When the engine overheats
Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your
emergency flashers. Put the transmission in “P” and apply the
parking brake.
A: If steam is coming from your engine:
Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign
of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously
damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until
there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of
very high pressure.
B: If no steam is coming from your engine:
Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.
Check the following.
Is the cooling fan operating?
Is the coolant in the acceptable range?
Is the engine drive belt O.K.?
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing
away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the
engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out
under pressure.
If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the
acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus
dealer.
If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant
temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your
vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your
vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible
by your Lexus dealer.
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place – well away from the
traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park
on a level spot with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned
will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack and cause personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”.
Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel
changing.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from
traffic.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on
top of or underneath the jack.
CAUTION
Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and
change the tire.
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to
reduce the possibility of personal injury:
NOTICE
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle
supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury may
occur.
Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving
even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel
beyond repair.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the
parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block
the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Access to spare tire
40R054a
40R053b
2. Take off the hook at the rear of the deck board.
1. Pull up the deck board.
3. Lift up the back side of the board and secure the board
by hooking it at the top of the back door opening with the
hook at the edge of the strap.
Make sure the board is secured and does not fall down.
Changing procedure
40R055
40R002b
When closing the board, replace the hook also in its
original position as shown.
NOTICE
If you close the back door with the board hooked, the
hook may be damaged.
1
4
Spare tire
Jack
2
5
Tool bag
Wrench
3
Jack handle
1. Get the jack, wrench and spare tire.
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize
yourself with the use of the jack and each tool, and their storage
locations. The jack is located under the tray for the jack handle
and wrench.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
40R003a
1
Joint
2
When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in the
“contract” direction until the jack is free.
3
When storing, turn the joint by hand in the “expand”
direction until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it
from flying forward during a collision or sudden
braking.
40R004a
To remove the spare tire:
1
Remove the spare tire cover.
2
Loosen the bolt and remove it.
When storing the spare tire, place it with the inner side of the
wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and install the spare
tire cover to prevent the tire from flying forward during a
collision or sudden braking.
40R062
2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep
the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one
of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
40R006
3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them. To get
maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle
is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the
end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the
wrench does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet – just unscrew them about one–half
turn.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could
cause a serious accident.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
40R007a
4. Position the jack at the jack points as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid surface.
40R008a
5. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the spare tire can be installed.
Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance when
putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack (it is a
loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle
and begins to lift, double–check that it is properly positioned.
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
40R009
6. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.
40R010
Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on the
mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of
wheels without good metal–to–metal contact at the mounting
surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause
a wheel to come off while driving.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
40R011
7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the
wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole.
Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.
40R012
8. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel
nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as you can
by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can tighten them
more.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do not use
other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench
is securely engaged over the nut.
CAUTION
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat
the process until all the nuts are tight.
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so
may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the
bolts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean it.
CAUTION
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of
your body and all other persons around will not be
injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.
Have the wheel nuts tightened by torque wrench at
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon as possible
after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may
loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.
9. After changing the wheel, check the air pressure of the
replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely.
If the pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to the
nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and possible cause air leakage.
If the cap is missing, put a new one on as soon as possible.
IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES
STUCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.,
then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving
it forward and backward.
If your vehicle is equipped with the traction control
system, turn off the system to become unstuck. (For
details, see “Traction control system” on page 207.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your tires.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire
are securely in place in their storage location to reduce
the possibility of personal injury during a collision or
sudden braking.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the following
precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and
other parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting
the selector lever or before the transmission is
completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the
wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle
several times, consider other ways such as towing.
IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE
TOWED
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using
either (a) or (b).
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
(b) Using a flat bed truck
(c) Never tow with a sling type truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions
given in “(d) Emergency towing” on page 257.
Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not
damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are
generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws
pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although
most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to
make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure
the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the
state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the
ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use
a towing dolly.
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
From front
40R052
40R013
Four–wheel drive models
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
Two–wheel drive models
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Never tow from the front with rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate
ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle.
Otherwise, the bumper and/or
underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged during
towing.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
From rear
(b) Using a flat bed truck
40R014
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
40R015
Tie down points
NOTICE
Never tow from the rear with front wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.
40R016
40R017a
A
Front
B Rear
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied
down at locations A and B as shown above.
40R063
Rear emergency towing eyelets
NOTICE
Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Tie down angle
40R019
If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the
angles shaded black must be at 45.
(c) Towing with a sling type truck
40R103
NOTICE
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front
or rear. This may cause body damage.
(d) Emergency towing
40R064
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid
sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet
and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
NOTICE
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your
vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme
caution when towing the vehicle.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only on hard–surfaced
roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels,
axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good
condition.
Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for
use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or
chain to the towing eyelet provided.
Never use the eyelets under the front bumper. If you
use them for towing, it may damage the vehicle and
cause an unexpected accident.
Before towing, release the parking brake and put the
transmission in “N”. The ignition key must be in “ACC” (engine
off) or “ON” (engine running).
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Emergency towing eyelet precautions:
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle:
Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not
broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not
loose.
Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.
The following methods are effective to use when your
vehicle is stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own
power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In
addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or
chain when towing.
To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
Remove the sand and soil in the front and the back of the
tires.
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.
Place stones or wood under the tires.
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is used to get out when
your vehicle becomes stuck in the mud, sand or other
condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power, make sure to observe the
precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive
stress will be put on the eyelet and the towing cable or
chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.
If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly
continue the towing. Contact your Lexus dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for assistance.
Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER
40R065
40R095
If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position to
other positions even though the brake pedal is depressed,
use the shift lock override button as follows:
1
Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”. Make sure the parking
brake is applied.
2
Pry up the cover with a flat–bladed screwdriver or
equivalent.
3
Push down the shift lock override button. You can shift out
of “P” position only while pushing the button.
4
Shift into “N” position.
Insert the cover. Start the engine. For your safety, keep
the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR
LOCK YOURSELF OUT
You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you
can give them the key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to
make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobiliser system must be
replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8.
You can use the wireless remote control system with the new
key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a
duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in,
we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the
least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid
cuts from the glass.
SECTION
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . .
262
263
266
267
For scheduled maintenance information, please refer
to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
It is recommended that any genuine Lexus parts be used
for maintenance.
Your Lexus vehicle has been designed to have fewer
maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to
save both your time and money. However, each regular
maintenance as well as day–to–day care is more important
than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble–free, safe, and
economical driving.
The owner may elect to use non–Lexus supplied parts for
replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use of replacement
parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the
effectiveness of the emission control systems.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance, including general maintenance services, is
performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission
control system warranties specify that proper maintenance
and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete
warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day–to–day care
practices that are important to your vehicle for proper
operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or
your Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or
repair of the emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual without invalidating this warranty.
See
“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Lexus technicians are well–trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in–dealership training programs.
They are well informed about the operation of all the systems
on your vehicle.
You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service
department performs the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements of your vehicle.
Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required
maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. And
if any problems should arise with your vehicle while under
warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again,
be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service
performed on your Lexus.
What about do–it–yourself maintenance?
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you
have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are
presented in Section 6.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that
any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your
Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.
If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechanic, the Lexus service
manuals are recommended.
Please be aware that
do–it–yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage.
See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.
CAUTION
Make these checks only where adequate ventilation can
be obtained if you run the engine.
Vehicle exterior
Items listed below should be performed from time to time,
unless otherwise specified.
Tire pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least
once a month and adjust as shown on the tire pressure label.
See page 299 for additional information.
Tire surface
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
See page 301 for additional information.
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for
looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Tire rotation
Vehicle interior
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For
scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)
See “Rotating tires” on page 300.
Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while
performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Fluid leaks
Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal
lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after
the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes
or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected
immediately.
Lights
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
function properly.
Doors and engine hood
Steering wheel
Check that all doors and back door operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary
latch secures the hood when the primary latch is released.
Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes
in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free
play or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters,
seatback recliner, etc., operate smoothly. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold
securely in any latched position. For folding–down rear
seatbacks, check that the latches lock securely.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors
and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the
belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort
or catching.
Brake pedal
Engine compartment
Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper
clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function.
Items listed below should be checked from time to time,
e.g. each time when refueling.
Brakes
Washer fluid
At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side
when applied.
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 320 for
additional information.
Parking brake
Engine coolant level
Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe
incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake
applied.
Make sure the coolant level is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the see–through reservoir when the engine is cold. See page
290 for additional information.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check the lock release button of the selector lever for proper
and smooth operation. On a safe incline, check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in “P” position
and all brakes released.
Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean
and not blocked with leaves, dirt or insects. See page 292 for
additional information.
Battery
Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have
to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however,
see page 313 for additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 297 for
additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and
the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 287 for additional
information.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in
the “HOT” or “COLD” range depending on the fluid
temperature. See page 298 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell
exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected
immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on page 191 .)
DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED
REPAIRING?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and
visual tip–offs that indicate service is needed. Some important
clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from
the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous
carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat–looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering,
uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level
road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal,
pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when
braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It
could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs
which include OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission
control system. When the OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle
may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact
your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your
vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not
been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.
However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the
codes may not be completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently
due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several
driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test even the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re–testing.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
6–1
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do–it–yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
270
272
273
274
276
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
61R035
Under the front passenger’s seat
61R001
Top left of the instrument panel
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal
identifier for your vehicle. This number is stamped under
the front passenger’s seat. It is also shown on the left top
of the instrument panel and can be seen through the
windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
63R004a
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the
Certification Label.
61R006
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as
shown.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
61R044
1
Engine coolant
reservoir
2
Power steering fluid
reservoir
3
Engine oil level
dipstick
4
Engine oil filler cap
5
Fuse box
6
Brake fluid reservoir
7
Fuse box
8
Battery
9
Radiator
10
Condenser
11
Electric cooling fans
12
Washer fluid tank
DO–IT–YOURSELF SERVICE
PRECAUTIONS
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing
may result in operating problems.
Performing do–it–yourself maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate
Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for those items that are
relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in
Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be
performed by a qualified technician with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do–it–yourself
maintenance, see “Parts and tools” on page 274.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to
prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you
should be especially careful to observe:
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing,
and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
(Removing rings, watches, and ties is
advisable.)
Right after driving, the engine compartment – the
engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power
steering fluid reservoir, etc. – will be hot. So be
careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may
also be hot.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or the battery.
Their fumes are
flammable.
Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack
supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
Be sure that the ignition is off if you work near the
electric cooling fans or radiator grille. With the
ignition on, the electric cooling fans will
automatically start to run if the engine coolant
temperature is high and/or the air conditioning is on.
Use eye protection whenever you work on or under
your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.
It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
PARTS AND TOOLS
NOTICE
Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high
currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform
do–it–yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are
designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.
Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you
have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
Checking the engine oil level
Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or
excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
See page 288 for details about engine oil selection.
Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid and
power steering fluid, or the transmission and power
steering could be damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the
wiper frame.
Parts (if level is low):
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)
Checking the engine coolant level
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent
See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 290 for
instructions.
Demineralized or distilled water
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding coolant)
Checking brake fluid
Checking the cartridge type fuses
Parts (if level is low):
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage
rating as original
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Adding washer fluid
Checking power steering fluid
Parts:
Parts (if level is low):
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Tools:
Funnel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Checking battery condition
Tools:
Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Fuse with same amperage rating as original
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
POSITIONING THE JACK
61R018
61R010
Rear (four–wheel drive models)
When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the
jack correctly as shown in the illustrations.
Front
CAUTION
61R011
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to
reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle
supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
Rear (two–wheel drive models)
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the
parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block
the wheels on the opposite side of the jack up point
if necessary.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned
will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack and cause personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support
stands.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on
top of or underneath the jack.
NOTICE
Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle
may be damaged.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
6–2
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
280
283
285
285
286
287
290
292
292
SPECIFICATIONS
– GENERAL
Model
1MZ – FE
Type
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
87.5 83 mm (3.44 3.27 in.)
Displacement
2995 cm3 (182.7 cu.in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.15 – 0.25 mm (0.006 – 0.010 in.)
0.25 – 0.35 mm (0.010 – 0.014 in.)
Drive belt tension (with Borroughs drive belt
tension gauge No. BT–33–73F)
115 20 lb.
– FUEL
Fuel type
Only UNLEADED
Octane Rating
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
– LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
with filter
without filter
4.7 L (5.0 qt., 4.1 lmp.qt.)
4.5 L (4.8 qt., 4.0 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity (SAE):
62Z002
Outside temperature
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
– COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
9.0 L (9.5 qt., 7.9 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent
With ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of
aluminum components
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend
using “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
– Make
DENSO
NGK
– Gap
SK20R11
IFR6A11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery Open voltage at 20C (68F):
Charging rates
12.7V Fully charged
12.3V Half charged
11.9V Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off]
5A max.
FUEL
Fuel type
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
If your engine knocks ...
If you detect heavy knocking even when using the
recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while
holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus
dealer.
To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller
fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded
fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with
leaded gas will not.
However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a
short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the
specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB
3.5–M93 in Canada.
Gasoline containing detergent additives
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will
cause the three–way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to
function improperly.
Also, this can increase
maintenance costs.
Octane rating
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of
premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains
detergent additives to avoid build–up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent
additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.
Quality gasoline
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan
have developed a specification for quality fuel named
World–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be
applied world wide. The WWFC consists of three
categories that depend on required emission levels. In the
U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves
air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle
fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle
performance.
Use of unleaded fuel with an Octane Rating or Research
Octane Number lower than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will lead to engine damage.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Cleaner burning gasoline
Gasoline quality
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated
gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE is available in many areas.
In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems
caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing
gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then
consult your Lexus dealer.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and
appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of
gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce
vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
Oxygenates in gasoline
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline
where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has
an octane rating no lower than 87.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing
methanol.
NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will
cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot
starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue
its use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.
Gasohol may cause paint damage.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive
called
MMT
(Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains
MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control
system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
Fuel tank capacity
75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)
FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM
The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the
engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine
stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine
after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start it.
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting
the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system has been damaged and it is
in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine.
FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL
CONSUMPTION
Functions of engine oil
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling
the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine
oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as follows.
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston
moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure
generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of
this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as
some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by
the high temperature combustion gases during the
combustion process.
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.
Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.
High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to
lubricate the exhaust valve stems.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the
viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the
vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high
speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings
and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to
serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check, see “Checking the
engine oil level” on page 287.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in
mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it
difficult to judge the true level accurately.
USED ENGINE OIL
For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show
any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles)
or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted
with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not
changed.
CAUTION
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then
driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear
that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.
Importance of engine oil level check
One of the most important points in proper vehicle
maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so
that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential
that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful
contaminants which may cause skin disorders such
as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with
it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe
and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil
and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service
station for information concerning recycling or
disposal.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
62e002a
62R042
1
Add oil
2
O.K.
3
Too full
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dipstick.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a
rag under the end. If it is between the low level mark ( 4 ) and
the full level mark ( 5 ), it is O.K.
1. To get a true reading, the vehicle should be on a level spot.
After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of the engine.
NOTICE
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it
clean.
Be careful not to drop the engine oil on the vehicle
components.
3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the
reading will not be correct.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use
Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
62R003b
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil.
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W–30
If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low mark,
add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time,
checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel
when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill
between the low level mark and the full level mark on the
dipstick is indicated below for reference.
62Z002
Outside temperature
When the level reaches within the correct range, return the filler
cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
SAE 5W–30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
Oil quantity. L (qt., lmp. qt.)
If SAE 5W–30 is not available, SAE 10W–30 may be used.
However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W–30 at the next
oil change.
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill the engine oil on the vehicle
components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after
adding the oil.
Oil identification marks
To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine,
the “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” range is available, which has
been specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details of the
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” range.
62R061
API Service Symbol
ILSAC Certification Mark
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you should use.
The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside
of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API
(American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL.
The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity
grade such as SAE 5W–30. “Energy–Conserving”, shown
in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel–saving
capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the
front of the container.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing,
there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator,
hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock
and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the radiator
cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.
62R043
1
3
Reservoir cap
Lower line
2
Upper line
Look at the see–through coolant reservoir when the
engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir. If the level
is low, add ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper
corrosion protection of aluminum components.
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine
temperature. However, if the level is on or below the “L” line,
add coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.
Always use ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion
protection of aluminum components. See information in the
next column.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator
cap when the engine is hot.
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling
system. Your coolant must contain ethylene–glycol type
coolant for a proper corrosion protection of your engine that
contains aluminum components. We have used “Toyota
Genuine Long life Coolant” in your Lexus vehicle. In order to
avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using
“Toyota Genuine Ling Life Coolant” or equivalent.
In addition to preventing freezing and subsequent damage to
the engine, this type of coolant will also prevent corrosion.
Further supplemental inhibitors or additives are neither
needed nor recommended.
The engine cooling system is integral to maximizing
performance of your Lexus vehicle. In line with this, it is
strongly recommended that you use “Toyota Genuine Ling Life
Coolant” for protecting the system, as it is and ethylene–glycol
based premium antifreeze coolant with excellent corrosion
protection properties that has been specifically formulated for
use in Lexus vehicles.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details of the
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” range.
Read the coolant container for information on freeze
protection. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much
to mix with plain water (preferably demineralized water or
distilled water). The total capacity of the cooling system is
given on page 282.
We recommend to use 50% solution for your Lexus, to provide
protection down to about –35C (–31F). When it is extremely
cold, to provide protection down to about –50C (–58F), 60%
solution is recommended. Do not use more than 70% solution
for better coolant performance.
NOTICE
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND
CONDENSER
SPARK PLUGS
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure
of their condition, take your vehicle to Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
62R031c
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the
radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
Your engine is fitted with iridium–tipped spark plugs.
To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do
not perform the work by yourself.
NOTICE
Use only iridium–tipped spark plugs and do not adjust
gaps for your engine performance and smooth
drivability.
SECTION
6–3
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
294
297
298
299
300
301
303
305
306
307
SPECIFICATIONS
– DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
0.9 L (1.0 qt., 0.8 Imp.qt.)
Oil type
Hypoid gear oil API GL–5
Recommended oil viscosity
Above –18C (0F) SAE 90
Below –18C (0F) SAE 80W or 80W–90
– AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
3.5 L (3.7 qt., 3.1 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV*
*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type T–IV” (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring
optimum transaxle performance.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF Type T–IV” may cause deterioration in
shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the
automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– TRANSFER
Oil capacity
0.9 L (1.0 qt., 0.8 Imp. qt.)
Oil type
Hypoid gear oil API GL–5
Recommended oil viscosity
Above –18C (0F) SAE 90
Below –18C (0F) SAE 80W or 80W–90
– BRAKES
Pedal clearance
122 mm (5.0 in.) Min. *1
Pedal free play
1 – 6 mm (0.04 – 0.24 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake adjustment
5 – 7 clicks *2
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1:
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the pressure of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf) with the engine running
*2:
Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the pressure of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf)
– STEERING
Wheel free play
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
– TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire size
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Vehicle loaded up to vehicle capacity
weight
Spare tire
Trailer towing (conventional and snow
tires)
P225/70R16 101S
210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 30 psi) (Both front and rear)
210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 30 psi)
210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 30 psi) (Both front and rear)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries
where such speeds are permitted by law, add 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2 or
bar, 5 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the
maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
16 6 1/2 JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf)
NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminum
wheel precautions” on pages 299 through 306.
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
63R007
CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid
can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your eyes, go to the doctor.
NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to
prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.
To check the fluid level, simply look at the see–through
reservoir. The level should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the tank.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the
brake pads wear. So be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious
mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid to the brake reservoir.
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake
fluid up to the “MAX” line.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid
absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause
a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CHECKING POWER STEERING
FLUID
63R014
63R013
Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary,
add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20
minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot
(60C – 80C or 140F – 175F). You may also check the level
when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C – 30C
or 50F – 85F) if the engine has not been run for about five
hours.
1
4
If hot O.K.
If cold add
2
If hot add
3
If cold O.K.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the
fluid is cold, the level should be in the “COLD” range. Similarly,
if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the “HOT” range. If the
level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic
transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift
up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir
cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose
connections for leaks or damage.
CAUTION
The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn
yourself.
NOTICE
CAUTION
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be
damaged.
Keep your tire pressure properly. Otherwise, the
following conditions may occur and cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injuries.
CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE
Low tire pressure (underinflation) —
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from overheated tire
63R015
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
High tire pressure (overinflation) —
Poor handling
Excessive wear at the center of the tire tread
The recommended cold tire pressures, tire size and the
vehicle capacity weight are given on the label.
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
You should check the tire pressures every two weeks, or at
least once a month. And don’t forget the spare! The air
pressure for the spare tire should be 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2 or
bar, 30 psi). Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel, reduce the
comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less
safe to drive.
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
The following instructions for checking tire pressure should be
observed:
ROTATING TIRES
The pressure should be checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since,
you will get an accurate cold tire pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the
tire can be misleading. Besides, tire pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
61R032
Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure after driving. It is
normal for the tire pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
The
passengers and luggage weight should be located so that
the vehicle is balanced.
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve
caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause
air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put
on as soon as possible.
To equalize the wear and help extend tire life, Lexus
recommends that you rotate your tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.) However, the
most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary
according to your driving habits and road surface
conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage.
Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure,
improper wheel alignment, out–of balance wheels, or severe
braking.
Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the direction
of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction
when using them again. Tires should be stored in a cool dry
place.
CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES
When to replace your tires
If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep
enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal
damage, the tire should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced.
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
63R006
If an air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving with
a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire
beyond repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by
a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom
been used.
1
3
New tread
Worn tread
2
Tread wear indicator
This also applies to the spare tire and tires stored for future use.
Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators show.
The location of the tread wear indicators is shown by the
marks such as “TWI” or “∆” marks molded on the sidewall
of each tire.
The tires on your Lexus have built–in tread wear indicators to
help you know when the tires need replacement. When the
tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators
will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more
adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears
down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with
regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality
grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may
have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades – All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear – The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 – 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C – The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C – The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Tire selection
INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND
CHAINS
When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and
construction, and the same or greater load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Also, on four–wheel drive
models, all the tires must be the same brand and have the
same tread patterns.
When to use snow tires or chains
Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect
handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground
clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better
traction than snow or studded tires.
Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on
snow or ice.
Snow tire selection
CAUTION
If you need snow tires, select the same size, construction
and load capacity as the original tires on your Lexus.
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle
has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias–ply tires on
your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Four–wheel drive models:
Do not use tires of different brands, sizes,
construction or tread patterns, as this may cause
dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss
of control.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
Tire chain selection
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Four–wheel drive models:
Do not use snow tires of different brands, sizes,
construction or tread patterns, as this may cause
dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss
of control.
63r007a
1
Side chain
2
Cross chain
Snow tire installation
Use the tire chains of correct size.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
For P225/70R16 101S tires, use the following type chains.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels only can lead to an
excessive difference in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Snow tires should be inflated to the same pressure as
the original tires.
Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of
snow tires.
mm
(in.)
A: Diameter of side chain
3.0
(0.12)
B: Width of side chain
10.0
(0.39)
C: Length of side chain
30.0
(1.18)
D: Width of cross chain
14.0
(0.55)
E: Length of cross chain
25.0
(0.98)
F: Diameter of cross chain
4.0
(0.16)
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary
according to location or type of road. Always check the
local regulations before installing chains.
NOTICE
If the wrong combination of tire and chain is used, the
chains could damage the vehicle body.
Chain installation
Install the chains on the front tires as tightly as possible.
Do not use tire chains on the rear tires. Retighten chains
after driving 0.5 – 1.0 km (1/4 – 1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the
instructions of the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain
manufacturer’s
recommended
speed
limit,
whichever is lower.
Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp
turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheel braking, as use of
chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive
carefully. Slow down before entering the curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an
accident may occur.
REPLACING WHEELS
When to replace your wheels
If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or
heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace damaged wheels, the tire may slip off the
wheel or cause loss of handling control.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they
may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have
been straightened may have hidden structural damage and
therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure
that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity,
diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus
dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect
handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Four–wheel drive models:
Do not use wheels of different brands, sizes and
types, as this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of control.
ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS
When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts
are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000
miles).
If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000
miles).
When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels.
Use only the Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for
your aluminum wheels.
When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum
wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.
SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits,
spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
6–4
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical components
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
310
313
316
316
319
320
321
322
SPECIFICATIONS
– FUSES
– FUSE LOCATIONS
64R003
Engine compartment
64R032
64R098
Engine compartment
1
3
2 Engine compartment
Driver’s side instrument panel
No.
64R099
Driver’s side instrument panel
FUSE
AMPERE
1
DRL
7.5
Daytime running light system
2
TOWING
20
Trailer lights
3
H–LP R
LWR
15
Right–hand headlight
(low beam)
4
H–LP L
LWR
15
Left–hand headlight
(low beam)
5
HAZARD
15
Emergency flashers, Turn signal
lights
6
AM2
20
Starting system
7
TEL
8
FL DOOR
20
Power door lock system
9
SPARE
7.5
Spare fuse
10
SPARE
15
Spare fuse
11
SPARE
25
Spare fuse
12
ALT–S
7.5
Charging system
13
HORN
10
Theft deterrent system, Horn
14
EFI
20
Multiport fuel injection
system/Sequential multiport fuel
injection system
15
DOME
10
Interior light, Vanity lights, Foot
lights, Rear personal light,
Gauges and meters,
Multi–display
16
ECU–B
7.5
Multiplex computer
17
RAD NO.1
25
Audio system
15
CIRCUIT
Telephone
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
No.
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
32
P FR
DOOR
20
Front door lock, Front power
window
33
S/ROOF
20
Moon roof
34
HEATER
15
Air conditioning system
Air fuel ratio sensor
35
GAUGE
7.5
Multiplex computer, Service
reminder indicators
7.5
SRS system, Multiport fuel
injection/Sequential multiport fuel
injection system
36
RR WIP
15
Rear window wiper
37
STOP
20
7.5
Audio system, Multiplex
computer
Stop lights, High mounted
stoplight, Anti–lock brake
system, Traction control system
38
OBD
7.5
On–board diagnosis system
39
SEAT HTR
15
Seat heater system
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
18
ABS 3
7.5
Anti–lock brake system
19
H–LP R
UPR
15
Right–hand headlight
(high beam)
20
H–LP L
UPR
15
Left–hand headlight
(high beam)
21
A/F HTR
25
22
IGN
23
RADIO
NO.2
CIRCUIT
24
CIG
15
Cigarette lighter, Outside rear
view mirrors, Power door lock
system
40
STARTER
7.5
Starting system
25
D RR
DOOR
20
Rear door lock, Rear power
window
41
WASHER
20
Washer
PWR
OUTLET
RR FOG
7.5
No circuit
15
Power outlets
42
26
FR DEF
20
FR FOG
15
Fog lights
43
27
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defogger
28
SRS–IG
15
SRS system
44
TAIL
10
29
ECU–IG
15
Telephone, Inside rear view
mirror, Anti–lock brake system,
Traction control system,
Multi–display
Tail lights, Side marker lights,
License plate lights, Parking
lights
45
PANEL
7.5
Instrument panel lights
46
ABS
60
Anti–lock brake system
30
WIPER
25
Windshield wipers
47
ALT
140
Charging system
31
P RR
DOOR
20
Rear door lock, Rear power
window
48
RDI
40
Cooling fan system
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
49
CDS
40
Cooling fan system
50
RR DEF
30
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defogger
51
HEATER
50
Blower
52
MAIN
50
Starting system
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
53
AM1
40
Ignition system
54
POWER
30
Power seats
The battery produces flammable and explosive
hydrogen gas.
CIRCUIT
Precautions
CAUTION
Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery
terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near
the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the
medical office.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical
attention immediately.
Checking battery exterior
If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a
possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so
immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow
the procedure above, if necessary.
64R163
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large
quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of
magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go
immediately for emergency help.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
1
Terminals
2
Hold–down clamp
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections,
cracks, or loose hold–down clamps.
1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm
water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to
prevent further corrosion.
2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts – but
do not overtighten.
3. Tighten the hold–down clamp only enough to keep the
battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery
case.
NOTICE
Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned
off before performing maintenance.
Checking battery condition
Checking by indicator
When checking the battery, remove the ground cable
first and reinstall it last.
Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
64R164
Take care no solution gets into the battery when
washing it.
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
1
RED – Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
2
BLUE – Good condition
3
WHITE – Charging necessary. Have the battery checked
by your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Do not refill the battery with water.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
BATTERY RECHARGING
PRECAUTIONS
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE
BLADE TYPE FUSES
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen
gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground cable.
2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when
connecting the charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
CAUTION
Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do
not charge the battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a
quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode
causing personal injuries.
64R053
Engine compartment
64R010b
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.
Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Engine compartment
1
Pull–out tool
2
Spare fuses
64R011b
Driver’s side instrument panel
1. Turn the ignition switch off and remove the auxiliary
box.
64L013
2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull
the suspected fuse straight out with the pull–out tool and
check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.
Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The
auxiliary box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them
in your vehicle for emergencies.
64R168
If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with
the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Good
Blown
a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse
has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try
replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that
you know is good.
b. Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on
the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull
out the “RAD NO.1”, “RADIO NO.2” or “PWR OUTLET” fuse,
which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its
amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower
than, but as close as possible to, the amperage. If the
amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out
again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute
to its original clips.
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any
other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause
extensive damage and possibly a fire.
CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE
FUSES
If the headlights or other electrical components do not
work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the
cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are
blown, they must be replaced.
64R013
Engine compartment
64R014b
Driver’s side instrument panel
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
ADDING WASHER FLUID
64R169
64R016b
1
Type A
2
Type B
3
Good
4
Blown
If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses
are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is
damaged.
CAUTION
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for
replacement. Never install an ordinary wire – even for
a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and
possibly a fire.
NOTICE
Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical
overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold
areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at
your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not fill washer fluid over the “NORMAL” level.
CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM
Adjusting the vertical aiming
(Vehicles with discharge headlight only)
64R101
64R100
1
2
Vertical movement adjusting bolt 1
Vertical movement adjusting bolt 2
Before checking the headlight aim:
1. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 in either
direction. At this time, keep the turning direction and number
of turns in mind.
2. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 the same
number of turns and in the same direction at step 1.
1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.
3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat and puts the vehicle in
a state readying for a driving (with a full tank).
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT LOCATION
The illustration on the following pages show the locations of
light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the
bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.
64R033
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light
bulbs while they are hot.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
require special handling. They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic
or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb
with bare hands.
Light Bulbs
Bulb No
W
Type
1
Headlights (high beam)
9005
60
A
2
Headlights (low beam)
Discharge bulb
Halogen bulb
D2R
9006
35
51
B
C
3
Parking lights
168
5
E
4
Front turn signal lights
7440
21
E
5
Fog lights
9006
51
C
6
Front side marker lights
194
3.8
E
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may
temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in
a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is
caused by the temperature difference between the outside and
inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogged up in the rain.
However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the
lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your
Lexus dealer.
64R034
64R035
Light Bulbs
Bulb No
W
Type
Bulb No
W
Type
7
High mounted stoplight
921
18
E
13
Vanity lights
Light Bulbs
–––
1.5
F
8
Rear turn signal lights
–––
21
E
14
Personal light
–––
10
D
9
Stop/tail lights
7443
21/5
E
15
Interior lights
–––
8
F
10
Rear side marker lights
194
3.8
E
16
Door courtesy light
–––
5
E
11
Back–up lights
7440
21
E
17
Glove box light
–––
1.2
E
12
License plate lights
168
5
E
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: D2R discharge bulbs
C: HB4 halogen bulbs
D: Single end bulbs
E: Wedge base bulbs
F: Double end bulbs
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
SECTION
6–5
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Body
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
326
327
328
330
SPECIFICATIONS
– DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Overall length
4580 mm (180.3 in.)
Overall width
1815 mm (71.5 in.)
Overall height
1670 mm (65.7 in.)*
Wheelbase
2615 mm (103 in.)
Tread
1565 mm (61.6 in.)
1550 mm (61.0 in.)
– Front
– Rear
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage)
380 kg (840 lb.)
*Unladen vehicle
– FUEL TANK
Capacity
75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)
PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long–term
corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle
are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in
hard–to–reach areas under the vehicle.
Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor
accidents or by stones and gravel.
The following conditions will cause or accelerate
corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your
vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible
and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings
as soon as possible.
The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in
the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
High humidity, especially at temperatures just above
freezing point.
Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an
extended period of time, even though other parts of the
vehicle are dry.
To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these
guidelines:
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition,
observe the following points.
If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near
the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month to minimize corrosion.
High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the
vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and
dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud
and debris without removing them. The lower edge of
doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes
which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped
water in these areas can cause corrosion.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter
is over.
See “Washing and waxing” on page 328 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you
find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up
immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or
scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
Components of the vehicle which are prevented from
quick–drying due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed
to high ambient temperature.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can
accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is
dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals,
cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in
proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately
clean and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you drive on salted or
gravel roads, mud shields help protect your vehicle. Full–size
shields, which come as near to the ground as possible, are the
best. We recommend that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist corrosion. Your Lexus
dealer will be happy to assist in supplying and installing the
shields if they are recommended for your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed
place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or
if you drive it in covered with water or snow, your garage may
be so damp it will cause corrosion. Even if your garage is
heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing your Lexus
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.
The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or
corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as
possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
When having coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass
of an insect
When driving in the areas where there is a lot of smoke,
soot, dust, iron dust and chemical substance
When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and
mud
Hand–washing your Lexus
Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot
to the touch.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road
salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap, mixed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it
wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard
– let the soap and water remove the dirt.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are
damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic
substance splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with
water and check if the ornament is damaged.
CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel
ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents
while the vehicle is moving.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do
not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side
molding faces are soft.
Automatic car wash
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure it is
retracted before driving your vehicle through an
automatic car wash.
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but
remember that the paint can be scratched by some type of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process
itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially
on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able
to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your
vehicle.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene,
benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or
cause damage.
3. Rinse thoroughly – dried soap can cause streaking. In hot
weather you may need to rinse each section right after you
wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft
cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard – you might scratch the
paint.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Waxing your Lexus
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the
original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.
Once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water
well, apply wax.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing,
even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become
extremely weathered, use a car–cleaning polish, followed by
a separate wax.
Carefully follow the manufacturer’s
instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the
chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but
remains on the surface in large patches.
CAUTION
Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the
floor. This may prevent the side airbags from
activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow
water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get into audio
components or other electrical components above or
under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a
malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.
Leather Interior
The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to a leather
product, some parts of leather may be rough, uneven or
scratched originally.
To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it
periodically twice a year.
Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways:
1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool.
2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
traces of detergent with it.
3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth.
Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of
wet may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather.
NOTICE
Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the
treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove
dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.
If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral
detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine,
alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for
cleaning the leather as these could cause
discoloring.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may
scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be
especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the
leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your
vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot
summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as
these tend to stick to leather when warm.
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could
result in discoloration or staining.
Synthetic Leather Areas (Dash)
The synthetic leather areas may be easily cleaned with a
mild soap or detergent and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then,
using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
synthetic leather. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes
to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a
clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the
procedure. Commercial foaming–type cleaners are also
available which work well.
Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner
on the interior.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as
possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some
are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which
you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the
carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in
overlapping circles. Do not apply water – the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the
shampoo instructions and follow them closely.
The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or
with lukewarm water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for
excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
NOTICE
Use a good foam–type shampoo to clean the carpets.
Do not use dye or bleach on the belts – it may weaken
them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
The windows may be cleaned with any household
window cleaner.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
Air Conditioning Control Panel, Car Audio,
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and
Switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly
wipe off any dirt.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or
peeling of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances
mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid
onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean
any spill using the method mentioned above.
If you have any questions about the cleaning of your
Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
SECTION
7
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (Toll–free: 1–800–25–LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or
366–0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel selection:
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of
premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.
Fuel tank capacity:
75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp. gal.)
Engine oil:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivqlent
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W–30
Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.)
Drain and refill
with filter
4.7 (5.0, 4.1)
without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)
See page 287 for detailed information.
Engine coolant:
Capacity: 9.0 L (9.5 qt., 7.9 lmp. qt.)
Automatic transaxle:
Fluid type – Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV
See page 294 for detailed information.
Tire information:
See page 299 through 306 for detailed information.
Tire pressure:
Tire size: P225/70R16 101S
cold tires
kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Vehicle loaded up
Vehicle load up
to vehicle capacity
to 4 occupants
weight
Front tires . . . . . . 210 (2.1, 30) . . . . . . 210 (2.1, 30)
Rear tires . . . . . . 210 (2.1, 30) . . . . . 210 (2.1, 30)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add
30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 5 psi) to the front tires and
rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire
pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
Coolant type – “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or
equivalent
With ethylene–glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion
protection of aluminum components
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone.
For checking the engine coolant, see page 290.
2003 RX300 from Aug. 02’ Prod. (OM48442U)